JP2019063286A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing an interest of a player.SOLUTION: Game state setting means can set a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state. Notification performance execution means executes a notification performance which can notify that a second game state is set after a privilege game executed by privilege game execution means is completed during the privilege game. The notification performance execution means executes the notification performance until a predetermined completion condition is satisfied when the privilege game in which the first game state is set is completed. Thereby, it can be made easy to notify that the second game state is set in the notification performance and an interest of a player can be increased.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 111

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games for which an advantageous bonus game is performed.

JP, 2012-217766, A

  However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 performs dynamic display for dynamically displaying a discrimination means capable of executing predetermined discrimination and identification information for indicating discrimination results of the discrimination means for a predetermined period. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; As a game state set after the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, a first gaming state advantageous to the player and a second game advantageous to the player than the first gaming state A game state setting unit capable of setting a state, and at least a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as an effect result can be executed during execution of the bonus game Notification production execution hand Have the notification effect execution means after completion of the award game for the first game condition is set, in which a predetermined end condition is to be executed the notification effect until satisfied.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the measuring means capable of measuring the number of discriminations of the discriminating means and whether or not the number of discriminations measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number The end condition is satisfied when it is determined by the measurement determining means that the number of determinations after the first gaming state has been set has reached the predetermined number of times It is a thing.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is stopped in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode. A special benefit game execution means capable of executing a special benefit game capable of providing a special benefit different from the benefit that can be given to the player by the benefit game based on the displayed special bonus game, or the special effect game or the special When the bonus game is executed, it has variable means that can be changed from the first state to the second state, and the end condition is the state in which the first gaming state is set, the special bonus It is established when a game is executed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the notification effect executing means performs the first one by the bonus game executing means until the end condition is satisfied. When a bonus game in which a gaming state is set is executed, the notification effect is executed until the termination condition is satisfied after the bonus game is ended.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the special game can be performed for a predetermined period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Special game execution means, special period setting means capable of setting a special period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means, and remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means And a special period notifying unit capable of notifying of remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the special period determined by the remaining period determining unit, the special period notifying unit including: The remaining special period information is notified when the end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the determination means capable of performing the predetermined determination, the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the movement thereof A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the stop display of the identification information dynamically displayed by the target display execution unit in a specific display mode, and the bonus game execution unit As the gaming state set after the end of the bonus game executed by the game, the first gaming state which is advantageous to the player, and the second gaming state which is advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is set Informing effect executing means capable of executing an informing effect capable of informing that the second gaming state is set as an effect result at least while the bonus game is being executed. Have the notification Out executing means, after completion of the award game for the first game condition is set, in which a predetermined end condition is to be executed the notification effect until satisfied.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, it has a measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of discrimination of the discriminating means, and a measurement discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the number of times of discrimination measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number, This is established when it is determined by the measurement determination means that the number of determinations after the first gaming state is set has reached the predetermined number.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, it is possible to give the player by the bonus game From the first state to the second state when the special bonus game execution means capable of executing the special bonus game capable of giving the special bonus different from the bonus, and the special bonus game or the special bonus game is executed. The end condition is satisfied when the special bonus game is executed in a state where the first gaming state is set.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effects can be achieved. That is, when a bonus game in which the first gaming state is set is executed by the bonus game execution unit until the termination condition is satisfied, the notification effect execution unit is executed after the completion of the bonus game. The notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the following effects can be achieved. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period, and a special period during which the special game is executed by the special game execution means Special period setting means capable of setting the remaining period judging means capable of judging the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the remaining period of the special period judged by the remaining period judging means Special period informing means capable of informing the remaining special period information for indicating, the special period informing means notifying the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a 3rd symbol in a 1st embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a display. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button production which is executed corresponding to each special design fluctuation in 1st execution form. It is the timing chart which showed the flow in which duplication button production is performed as button production performed corresponding to each special symbol change in a 1st embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the button production period in 1st execution form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when button effect A is started on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a view in a 1st embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content displayed when button production A succeeds on the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content displayed when button production A fails in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when button production B is started on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a view in a 1st embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when button production B is complete | finished on the display screen of 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when button production C which is duplication button production is started on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, (b), It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the button effect C which is duplication button effect is complete | finished on the display screen of 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a main control device in the first embodiment It is the model which showed typically the content of the 2nd per random number table set to ROM of (4). (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a main control device of the first embodiment It is the model which showed typically the contents of the table for special figures 1 set to ROM, and (c) shows the contents of the table for special figures 2 set to ROM of the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is the model which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for normals set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability variation and time-shortening set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for latent confirmation set to ROM of (1). It is the model which showed typically the content of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the button presentation selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the button effect hierarchy memory area set to RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B-D. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-games update process performed by MPU in a control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the holding ball number process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 button production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the execution timing setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 button production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the button presentation mode setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the button production start processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the button effect update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flow chart which showed the 2nd frame button setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the button pressing process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the variable stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the retention production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in 2nd execution form. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the retention production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in 2nd execution form. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the usual eight pieces reservation production start screen displayed with the 3rd design display device in 2nd execution form, (b), it is the display with the 3rd design display device in the 2nd execution form It is the figure which showed an example of the production result of the usual eight piece reservation production done. (A) is a figure showing an example at the time of super holding production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment being started, (b) is a 3rd symbol display in a 2nd embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content displayed at the time of completion | finish of the super holding effect displayed by an apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the model which showed the content of the holding presentation selection table comprised by ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the structure of the presentation hierarchy storage area comprised by RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the set 1st presentation hierarchy storage area 223 to the schematic diagram. It is the model which showed typically the relativity of each hierarchy storage area and the performance information set. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the number-of-holding-balls process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special holding production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation aspect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the related production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button pressing process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation level selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in 3rd execution form. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the battle effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example at the time of winning by battle production. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example in the case of losing in the battle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the third embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed an example at the time of becoming a rematch by the battle production displayed by. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example in the case of being defeated by battle production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a 3rd symbol in a 3rd embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed an example in the case where the battle production displayed on a display apparatus is complete | finished and a time saving state is alert | reported. It is the model which showed the structure of ROM of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 1st big hit random number 2 table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a main control device in the third embodiment It is the model which showed typically the contents of the special figure 1 big hit classification selection table which is set to the ROM of (c) is the special figure 2 big hit classification which is set to ROM of the main control device in 3rd execution form It is the model which showed the content of the selection table typically. It is the model which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the battle production update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit start processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in the 1st deformation example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st modification, (b) is an example of the fluctuation production displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation production displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st modification. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the multi reach effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd modification. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the multi reach effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd modification. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the ball entering unit typically. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the multi reach effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 3rd modification. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting end processing 4 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd deformation example. It is the flowchart which showed the battle production update process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. It is the flowchart which showed the frequency | count correction presentation performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation start processing 4 which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd deformation example. It is the flowchart which showed the correction frequency corresponding | compatible process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd modification. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for probability change and time-shortening set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 4th modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 91, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640, etc. capable of entering a large number of nails and balls is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a are for the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like that guides the vehicle is attached. The contents of a large number of ball entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9).

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  In the lower tray unit 50, a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b are provided as operation means operable by the player. The first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22 when both frame buttons are shown) are displayed, for example, by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The game is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect to be performed or changing the content of the effect of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the effect (button effect) is set such that the operation frequency of the first frame button 22a is higher than that of the second frame button 22b. The first frame button 22a, which has a high operation frequency, is disposed to the left of the second frame button 22b in the front view of FIG. As a result, in the button effect performed while the player is operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the first frame button 22a that is easy to be operated can be easily operated with the left hand, so the button effect is performed. Every time the game is played, it is possible to suppress that the operation of the operation handle 51 is stopped (playing game) and the operation of the game is reduced.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the second frame button 22b is likely to be an operation target in the button effect executed when the result (for example, a large hit) to be advantageous to the player is notified. It is configured to be As a result, only by performing the button effect for operating the second frame button 22b, that is, expecting the player to win a jackpot before operating the second frame button 22b be able to.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the second frame button 22 b is disposed substantially at the center of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the button effect directed to the second frame button 22b is executed, the player can be made to operate the second frame button 22b (for example, pressing operation using both hands) with a spirit. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the first frame button 22a having a high operation frequency is smaller than the second frame button 22b. Specifically, the first frame button 22a has a radius of 3 centimeters, The two-frame button 22b is formed in a cylindrical shape with a radius of 6 centimeters. As a result, it is possible to make the second frame button 22b with a low frequency of operation (the advantage is easily given to the player when the user operates the second frame button 22b) noticeable.

  In the present embodiment, the second frame button 22b is more visible than the first frame button 22a by making the frame button 22 different in size, but the player is required to make a second button effect. The second frame button 22b may be configured to be more noticeable than the first frame button 22a at the timing of operating the frame button 22b. For example, the second frame button 22b may be variably operated. When the button effect is performed, a variable operation may be performed to cause the second frame button 22b to protrude upward (upward in the viewpoint of FIG. 1). In this case, when the button effect is not performed, the first frame button 22a may be configured to be more prominent than the second frame button 22b. As a result, when the button effect is executed, an effect that the second frame button 22b suddenly appears can be executed, so it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. Ball opening 63, ball entering unit 64 (first ball entering 64b1, left second ball entering 64b2), second ball entering 640, variable winning device 65, normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, variable display The unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. General ball entry port 63, ball entry unit 64 (first ball entry port 64b1, left second ball entrance port 64b2), second ball entry port 640, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80 are processed by router processing. It is disposed in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the turning rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered by the back surface (surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of transparent resin (for example, ABS) It is configured such that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are displayed in accordance with each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b enter the second ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640 if the ball has entered the ball for the first ball entrance 64b1 (winning). It is configured to be used properly depending on the ball (winning). Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 (winning), the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is in the left second ball entrance 64b2, or The first symbol display device 37 b is configured to operate when entering the second ball entry port 640 (winning). That is, the first symbol display device 37a is a display means for showing a lottery result of a lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 and the first symbol display The device 37b is a display means for indicating the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second left ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether the gaming state (certain change state, latent state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the lighted state by the LED, or the first symbol changes Indicates whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display a combination of symbols for showing lottery results), or the stop symbol corresponds to a jackpot advantageous to the player or is it disadvantageous The lit state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the outlying symbol, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lit state, and the number of rounds in the big hit and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, although various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), any structure that allows the player to identify various game states may be used. For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (flashing mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is on and the period in which the light is off.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, drawing is triggered by the fact that the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 enter a ball (winning) (lottery of special symbols) Is done. And in the lottery of the special symbol, it performs a yes or no judgment (big hit lottery) whether or not it is a big hit. Here, on the basis of the determination that the jackpot is won, the jackpot game to be a bonus game state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where it is possible to easily win a ball, and by winning the ball in the specific winning opening 65a, many winning balls can be made in a short time The jackpot game that can be acquired with is executed. During this big hit game, it is executed after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display), and the opening period (for example, 1 second) of the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) Period in which the closed state is difficult to enter), the round game period in which the open state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, until the next round game is started after one round game period is over) A jackpot game consisting of an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state of the predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) is set after the last round game period is over. A period is set.

  In this manner, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the big hit is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display), the opening period is set to match the timing when each winning opening in the big hit game is opened. Since preparation can be made to fire in any direction, the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Further, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the present jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress that a new special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the last round game is over, so after the jackpot game is over Since it is possible to prepare to shoot the ball in any direction for the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, it is also determined the jackpot type. Although detailed description will be described later, as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of jackpot game is 16 rounds, and a definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) 16R probability variation big hit, the number of rounds of the big hit game is 4 rounds, 4R probability variation big hit big round game, the jackpot given the probability change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) after the big hit game is over The number is 4 rounds, and the 4R time junior high jackpot to which time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is given after the big hit game is prepared.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the benefit most advantageous to the player in the 16R probability variation jackpot (the number of award balls that can be awarded during the jackpot game is the largest, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is the most advantageous for the player ) Is a jackpot to be awarded, and then the 4R probability variation jackpot is configured to be less advantageous in the order of 4R hour jackpot. As described above, even when the special figure lottery wins the jackpot, the degree of advantage of the benefit given to the player can be varied according to the type of the jackpot to be set. Not only the presence or absence of jackpot winning, but also the type of jackpot set at the time of jackpot winning can be made to be interested.

  In the present embodiment, two types of lottery results of the big hit and the big hit are determined in the big hit lottery, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, it is not the big hit described above as the lottery result of the big hit lottery In a part of cases where it is determined that the player is out of the game, the bonus given to the player is less than the above-described jackpot (for example, the bonus for opening the variable winning device 65 only for one round) good. This makes it possible to diversify the amount of benefit given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change (whether a small hit is possible for a pachinko machine capable of a small hit determination). Not only that, if it is a jackpot, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

  In the present embodiment, any one of the “normal state”, the “time saving state”, and the “probable change state” is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 16). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to the low probability (1/250), and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is set to the low probability (11/233). The game state (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: It is called low probability state, and in the time saving state, jackpot probability of special symbol is set to low probability (1/250), and hit probability of ordinary symbol is set to high probability (232/233) The gaming state (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, normal symbol: referred to as high probability state), the probability change state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability (1/50), the hit probability of the ordinary symbol Is a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) in which the probability of being set to the high probability (232/233) is given.

  Here, the high probability state of the special symbol is, as described above, a state in which the probability of becoming a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol is higher than the low probability state, and in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set. Then, both the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery and the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery are defined to be the same high probability value (1/50). In addition, for example, the high probability value may be set only for the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery, or the high probability value may be set only for the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery. The high probability value when the high probability state of the special symbol is set may be defined by making the special figure 1 lottery different from the special figure 2 lottery.

  Next, the high probability state of the normal symbol is a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is higher than the low probability state. When the player wins a hit in a normal symbol lottery (general drawing lottery), the electric role object 640a is opened as a hit game, and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 easily.

  In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, when winning a big hit in the lottery of special figure 1 (first special symbol) and in the lottery of the special figure 2 (second special symbol) won a big hit The jackpot type setting ratio is set to be different between the case and the jackpot, and the jackpot in which the player is given an advantageous advantage in the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special view 2 than the lottery of the special view 1 The configuration (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot) is configured to be easily set. By configuring in this manner, a lottery in which the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous for the player than the special figure 1 lottery is executed, and the gaming state in which the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed for the player The player can play the game while expecting that the time saving state and the probability changing state are set.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in order to make it easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 during the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the general view high probability middle), during the low probability middle state of the normal symbol On the other hand, the first mode which makes the probability of hitting a normal symbol a high probability, the second mode which increases the open time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role 640 a for one hit game, and the short time of fluctuation of the second pattern. It is configured to execute the third mode that makes it easy to set the fluctuation time, but the ball enters the second entrance port 640 more than the low probability state of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol. It may be configured to be in an easy-to-use state, and at least one of the three modes described above may be set. In addition, if the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured such that the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the low probability state of the normal symbol, among the three modes described above Alternatively, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured such that the ball is less likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the low probability state of the normal symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the surface of the game board 13 is formed a game area in which the shot balls can flow down, and the variable display unit 80 defines a game area. Specifically, the left gaming area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and the right gaming area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 are sectioned and fired at a predetermined first firing intensity. The ball flows down the left playing area, and the ball fired with the second firing strength, which is a firing strength stronger than the first firing strength, flows down the right playing area. Hereinafter, a game in which the operating handle 51 is operated so that the fired ball flows down the left gaming area is referred to as a left-handed game (normal game), and the operating handle is operated so that the fired balls flow down the right gaming area The game for operating 51 is referred to as a right-handed game and will be described.

  In the left game area, a general ball entry port 63 is disposed, in which ten balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The first symbol display device 37a, 37b is triggered by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) in the variable display unit 80. To the third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs the variable display of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variable display in and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 The 2nd symbol display device (not shown) comprised with LED which carries out the change display of the 2nd symbol by making passage of a ball of 2 as a trigger is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, while the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device, each time the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the symbol of "o" and the symbol of "x" as a display symbol (the second symbol (not shown)) The variable display is performed to alternately turn on for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in an operating state (open state) only for time.

  The normal symbol opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the right game area, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part (about 50%) of the balls flowing down the right area can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held (generally reserved number of drawings) is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown) Ru. The second symbol hold lamp is provided for four for the maximum hold number.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol are displayed. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) You may. Further, the number of assembled normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the assembling position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side (right gaming area) of the variable display unit 80, for example, even on the left side (left gaming area) of the variable display unit 80 good. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  As shown in FIG. 2, below the variable display unit 80, a lower gaming area in which the left gaming area and the right gaming area communicate with each other is formed, and a ball enters the substantially central part of the lower gaming area. A possible ball entry unit 64 is provided. Although the detailed configuration of this ball entry unit 64 will be described later, inside the ball entry unit 64, the first ball entry port 64b1, the second left ball entry port 64b2, and the ball can enter from the opening where the ball can enter. A sorting means is provided internally for alternately assigning the spheres into the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2.

  When the ball enters the first entrance 64b1, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance is turned on. A jackpot lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. In addition, when the ball enters the second left ball entrance 64b2, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 makes a jackpot lottery (special figure 2 lottery), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entry unit 64 is disposed substantially at the center of the lower game area, but the left-handed game is performed, and the ball flowing down the left game area performs the right-handed game. The ball is designed to be easier to enter the opening of the ball entry unit 64 than the ball flowing down the game area. Specifically, the path facing the ball entry unit 64 from the left gaming area through the lower gaming area by the game nail (ball guiding member) implanted in the gaming board 13 is from the right gaming area through the lower gaming area The ball is configured to be more likely to flow down than the path facing the ball entry unit 64.

  Therefore, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the electric role thing 640a is in the gaming state where it is difficult to open, the left hitting game is an appropriate game method. In this way, when it is determined that the right-handed game has been performed in the normal state by defining the proper game method (an area where only the ball flowing down the right area can pass (eg, through gate 67)). When it is determined that the ball has passed, it is possible to notify the player that a game different from the appropriate game method is being performed.

  Next, the configuration of the right gaming area will be described with reference to FIG. In the right game area, the above-mentioned through gate 67 is disposed, and on the downstream side thereof, the second ball entry port 640 and the motorized prize 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 are disposed. . The right game area is an area which can not flow down the ball which is fired by the left hitting game and flows down the left game area, and therefore the ball does not reach the through gate 67 or the second entrance 640 by the left hitting game. . In this way, the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the right game area or the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 even though the player is playing the left hitting game, which is a proper game method, in the normal state. It is possible to suppress the situation of entering the ball. Therefore, it is erroneously determined that an inappropriate game method (a game method in which a right-handed game is performed in a normal state) is performed for a player who is playing a game by an appropriate game method, and the game method is changed. It is possible to solve the problem that the notification for causing the game to be executed is performed and the gaming intention is lowered.

  Below the second entrance 640 (a part of the lower game area), a variable winning device 65 is disposed. The variable winning device 65 is opened during a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special drawing lottery, and the number of balls to be paid out when one ball is won (the number of prize balls) Is configured to be 15 pieces.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the rightward game is configured to make the ball reach the variable winning device 65 more easily than the leftward game, and a game state advantageous to the player (time reduction state, probability change) In addition to the state), it is configured to execute the right-handed game even during the jackpot game. As a result, when the game in the gaming state advantageous to the player and the big hit game are alternately executed, it is only necessary to continue the same game method (right-handed game), and the game method for the player can be It is possible to eliminate the need for complicated changes.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the other unit 228, the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating a drive accessory for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, and when the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are operated by the player, the third control is performed. It instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed by the symbol display device 81 or to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are operated by the player, a bonus item drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 to drive a bonus feature (not shown), or Set an audio output command for causing the audio output device 226 to output an audio corresponding to the operation content to the frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, or display a lamp in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content to the frame button 22 It may be configured to set a lamp output command for causing the device 227 to emit light.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7A. FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, and for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle and lower) L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5A). The third symbol (the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variable display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is Each of the ten main symbols is provided with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each piece of identification information that simulates a number. In this manner, by using the characters corresponding to the respective identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display The jackpot is configured to occur after the session is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed at the top, middle and bottom respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling in the horizontal direction with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured such that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed The symbol row is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the symbol row L3 in the lower figure is configured to be scrolled and displayed from right to left. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) not showing the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction, and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the oblique direction. In a state where each symbol row L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together in a combination of big hit symbols on the effective line (in the first embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols). For example, a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in the first embodiment, the respective effective lines (V1 to V5) are formed to include the symbol display positions of the respective symbol rows L1 to L3, so the third symbol is formed. Until all the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the third symbol variation display executed in the main display area Dm interesting until the final symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, and the number of the symbol rows, the direction of the fluctuation display of the symbols in the symbol rows, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol obtained by combining an image such as a figure or character and a numeral may be configured as a third symbol. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variation display area of the third symbol is displayed. Makes it difficult for the player to see if the third symbol is changing by reducing the size or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may do it. Also, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), and may be changed again.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which the player is difficult to identify Although it is configured to include the difference in (3), the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be made different so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is fluctuating.

  Next, contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5B, the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed on the upper right of the main display area Dm in a front view. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating whether or not the lottery condition of the special symbol (during lottery or not) and the lottery result is displayed. , The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) It is comprised so that the 4th symbol (special figure 2 4th symbol) for showing may be displayed on small display area Dm2.

  By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery situation of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can simultaneously change. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See FIG. 9 (a)), showing the situation that the special symbol is changing, and by displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 as a stop (see FIG. 10), the lottery result of the special symbol is shown. Although it is configured as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode for changing the figure or the color can be changed using the display mode imitating the figure as the fourth pattern or the display mode showing plural colors. It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by indicating that the special symbol is fluctuated depending on the display mode to be displayed and displaying a display manner showing a specific symbol or color in a stopped state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being performed (during variation), and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be configured so as to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in a lottery (during a change) without a warning. Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. Although the example which forms in the upper right side of field Dm is shown, the position where this 4th design display field is formed, size according to the production feature of the fluctuation production which is executed in the central part of main indicatory territory Dm It may be different.

  By comprising in this way, the area | region where a fluctuation production is performed is restrict | limited by 4th symbol display area, and it can suppress that a rendering effect falls. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to run.

  Furthermore, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode indicating the number of balls reserved in the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, which will be described later, in the number-of-holds display area (small display areas Dm1a and Dm1b), the number of balls held in each special view is displayed in a display mode using numbers. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using a color or a symbol such that the number of holding balls in the acquired drawing can be identified.

  A small display area Dm3 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm in a front view. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding a direction (game direction) in which the player is allowed to shoot a ball is displayed (see FIG. 5B).

  In the present embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as a guidance display area. By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be launched toward by simply viewing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Since it is possible, it is possible to provide the gaming machine which is easy for the player to understand.

  In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), the display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to perform the right-handed game and the left-handed game for the player The "left-handed" display mode for guiding the user is configured to be displayed, and the "right-handed" display mode is a game state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the time saving state, during the definite change state, and during the big hit game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. There is. In addition, the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, “left-handed” for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) The display mode is configured to be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5 (b), the explanation will be continued. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which the number display mode for displaying the number of holding balls of each special symbol is displayed, and in the small display area Dm1a, the number of holding balls for the first special symbol Special figure 1 reservation information for showing the number of memories) is displayed, and special figure 2 reservation information for showing the number of holding balls (number of reserved memories) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm 2 a.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are the result (pre-reading result) of discriminating the prize information stored in advance, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol. It is configured to display a display mode capable of suggestive notification to the player. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while giving expectation to the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbol stored and stored).

  Further, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 9A, the sub display area Ds is configured to display a comment on the game content being executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of holding balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a is displayed in the sub display area Ds. You may configure.

  In this case, for example, it may be configured to display in the sub display area Ds a holding display mode (for example, a holding symbol display mode having a circular shape) for individually indicating the number of holding balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the number of balls currently held for the special symbol by the displayed number of the held display mode. Furthermore, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning a prize information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the result of the judgment.

  By configuring in this manner, a game is performed while giving expectation that a big hit will be won in the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the holding symbol in which the display mode is changed among the holding symbols that can be present in plurality. You can Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since the holding symbols corresponding to the number of holding memories are displayed, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of holding symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the display of the suspension symbol changed to.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the information regarding the big hit game is displayed It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area of the main display area Dm to that of the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the contents to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the fact that it is the combination which falls off, when the retention sphere exists, the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the display mode which shows that the lottery result is out. After that, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started. In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in the state where the holding ball is not present, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. In this state, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters the first entrance 64b1, the second left entrance 64b2, or the second entrance 640. Continue until Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Even though the player has the ball continuously fired for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), any one of the first entrance 64b1, the second left entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640 is used. The situation where there is no ball entry is rare, and in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 is used as the player quits playing the game. It is due to the fact that no game is played at all.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a ball enters a new ball into any of the first entrance 64b1, the second left entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. The variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry is executed.

<About the contents of effects in the first embodiment>
Next, the contents of effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured with a game specification (so-called simultaneous change machine) in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 execute the special figure lottery in parallel, and further, the ball is The ball entering unit 64 to be made to flow is such that the balls are alternately entered into the first ball entrance 64b1 which is a lottery trigger of the special view 1 and the left second ball inlet 640 which is a lottery trigger of the special figure 2 Is configured. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation display effect of the third symbol for showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the third for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery If the fluctuation display effect of the symbol is executed simultaneously, there is a problem that the fluctuation display of a plurality of third symbols is mixed, and it becomes difficult to understand the lottery result of each special drawing. Furthermore, since it is necessary to divide the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is a limited area, and execute variable display of the third symbol corresponding to each special figure, the third symbol corresponding to each special figure There is a problem that the display area of the display becomes small and a variable display which is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

  In addition, if the variable display effect of the third symbol indicating the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display effect of the third symbol indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously executed, for example, each variable display The effect (button effect) to operate the frame button 22 (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) for the player in the effect can be executed, the third symbol variation showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery Execution timing of button effect (special figure 1 button effect) executed as display effect and execution of button effect (special figure 2 button effect) executed as variation display effect of the third symbol showing the result of special figure 2 lottery When the timing and the timing overlap, it is difficult for the player to grasp to which button effect the frame button 22 has been operated, and there is a problem that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

  Also, in the simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are performed independently (parallelly) as in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 button effect and the special figure 2 button effect overlap and are performed When trying to apply a restriction so that it does not occur, since the fluctuation start timing of each special drawing is indeterminate, a period (prohibited period) in which the button effect can not be set (executed) more than necessary is provided. Has become difficult to execute.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only the third symbol showing the lottery result of one of the special views ((special view 1) main fluctuation symbol) among the plurality of special views on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to perform variable display (main variable display). Thereby, since the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the main variation symbol can be variably displayed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to execute the variation display effect easy for the player to understand .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display is performed when the lottery result of the other special figure ((special figure 2) sub change symbol) not variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit. The object of the third symbol variably displayed on the display screen of the device 81 is configured to be switched. Thus, despite the fact that the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable manner), the game is executed on the basis of having won the big hit game (special figure 2 lottery) suddenly. Can be suppressed from being executed.

  In addition, when the button effect is executed as the variable display effect corresponding to the big hit of the special figure 2 while the button effect is being executed in the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure 1, It is configured to execute a special button effect combining the button effects performed on the figure. As a result, it is possible to suppress that a plurality of button effects are duplicated and individually executed to provide an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. Further, by executing the special button effect, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 can be switched to the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 without giving the player a sense of discomfort. it can.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the secondary variation symbol not displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big win, the target of the third symbol is switched from the primary variation symbol to the secondary variation symbol Although it is configured as described above, it is not limited to this, and part of the out-of-range fluctuation set when the lottery result of the sub-change symbol is out (for example, the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time selected at the time of jackpot win It is good to constitute so that the processing which changes the object of the 3rd design from the main change design to the sub change design is performed also in the out-of-order variation set). As a result, when an effect (for example, special button effect) for switching the target of the third symbol from the main variation symbol to the sub variation symbol is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is expected while winning a big hit. It is possible to make the variable display effect executed on the display screen of (3) be interesting to the end.

  Here, with reference to FIG.6 and FIG.7, each special figure fluctuation | variation in this embodiment and the content of the presentation performed are demonstrated. FIG. 6 is different from the button effect (button effect A) as the variable display effect of the special figure 1 (main change symbol) and the button effect (button effect B) as the variable display effect of the special figure 2 (sub change pattern) 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects when executed at a timing, and FIG. 7 is a button effect (button effect A) as a variable display effect of the special figure 1 (main variation symbol), and FIG. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production when it is executed at the timing where the button production (the button production B) and, as the fluctuation indicator production of the design) it overlaps.

  Here, first, with reference to FIG. 8, the specific flow of the button effect will be described. FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of the button effect. As shown in FIG. 8, during the effect period (button effect period) in which the button effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is executed, the operation on the frame button 22 (operation means) is effective for the player Preparation period t1 for informing the user, an execution period t2 in which the operation on the frame button 22 (operation means) is effectively determined (the player can operate the frame button 22), and the frame button 22 during the execution period It is formed from the result alerting | reporting period t3 by which the presentation based on the operation result to to is performed. In addition, during the execution period, when the player operates the frame button 22, an operation period t4 for notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  During the preparation period t1, a display mode is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to explain the contents of the effect displayed during the execution period. Specifically, for example, when the effect shown in FIG. 9 (a) is executed during the execution period, a comment of "I will start the effect of causing the sleeping rabbit" is displayed and the operation is performed. The button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a is displayed without displaying the valid period gauge 812a indicating the valid period. As a result, the player is notified beforehand of the contents of the effect to be executed later, and the player is notified in advance that the effect to be executed later is a button effect for operating the first frame button 22a.

  By providing the preparation period t1, the player can be prepared to operate the frame button 22 (operation means), and the frame button 22 (operation means) can be operated smoothly during the execution period t2. be able to.

  During the execution period t2, an effect for urging the player to operate the frame button 22 (operation means) is performed (see FIG. 9A). Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, the contents of the effect to be executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect will be described. FIG. 9A is a schematic view showing an example of effect contents to be executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the execution period t2 of the button effect (button effect A) is set, the character is displayed in the main display area Dm in a display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit is lying, and the sub display In the area Ds, a comment of “Wake up” is displayed to explain the contents (game contents) of the effect of the button effect this time. Then, a button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a which is an operation target of the button effect this time, and a valid period gauge 812a indicating the operation valid period t5 of the first frame button 22a are displayed.

  The valid period gauge 812a indicates the entire length of the operation valid period t5 to be set by the length of the outer frame (rectangle), and the remaining period aspect for indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 (FIG. 9 (a) is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining period form decreases from right to left. Thereby, an elapsed period mode for the display area (the mode shown as blank in FIG. 9A) in which the remaining period mode is not displayed among the valid period gauge 812a indicates an elapsed period of the operation valid period t5. It can be done.

  In this way, by displaying the length of the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 relative to the entire length of the operation valid period t5, the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 is specifically indicated by time. Even without it, the player can be made to grasp. In addition, even when a different operation effective period t5 is set, the length of the outer frame (rectangle) of the effective period gauge 812a is made constant, and the remaining period aspect is set only by changing the speed at which variable display is performed. It is possible to inform the player of the operation effective period t5 in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the player is notified of the operation effective period t5 in the button effect using the above-described effective period gauge 812a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation set The length of the effective period t5 and the remaining period of the operation effective period t5 may be notified by a specific numerical value (for example, the number of seconds). In the embodiment, the display form of the effective period gauge 812a is linearly formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the effective period gauge 812a is formed in a circular shape, and the remaining period form is the effective period gauge 812a. May be variably displayed clockwise, and may be configured to indicate that the operation valid period t5 ends when the remaining period aspect makes a round of the valid period gauge 812a. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the remaining period relative to the set operation effective period t5, and it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, a start position at which the remaining period aspect is variably displayed (for example, a position indicating 12 o'clock of the effective period gauge 812a formed in a circular shape) and an end position at which the remaining period aspect is variably displayed (for example, circularly formed Since it is possible to make the same 12) of the effective period gauge 812a, the operation effective period t5 is the effect pattern for the variable display one round of the remaining period aspect and the effect pattern for the variable display two rounds By providing, it is possible to set an unexpected effect for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. During the execution period t2 during which the effects illustrated in FIG. 9A are executed, when the player operates the first frame button 22a to be operated this time, it indicates that the first frame button 22a is pressed. An operation period t4 in which the effect for the purpose is performed is set. During this operation period t4, the display mode of the button 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device is the display mode after pressing (the thickness of the button 812 is thinner than the display mode shown in FIG. 9A). Is displayed as

  As described above, by setting the operation period t4 and displaying the display mode after being pressed, the operation means (the first frame button 22a) that is the operation target of the button effect of this time is operated by the player. It can be reliably notified that (pressed) has been made. Note that as a notification mode for notifying the player that the operation means to be operated has been operated, a configuration other than the above-described configuration for displaying the display mode after pressing may be used, for example, a voice output device Alternatively, a pressing sound may be output from 226 to indicate that the operating means (frame button 22) is operated (pressed), or the light emitting means may be provided on the operating means (frame button 22) to emit light. Depending on the light emission mode (emission color) of the means, it may be configured to be able to determine whether or not the operation has been completed.

  In addition to the configuration described above, when an operation means (second frame button 22b) different from the operation means (first frame button 22a) targeted for the operation of the button effect this time is operated during the execution period, You may be comprised so that the alerting | reporting alerting | reporting in order to show that the operated operation means operated is not operation object may be performed. As a result, in the gaming machine having a plurality of operation means, when the player operates the incorrect operation means, it is possible to easily guide the user to the proper operation.

  When the execution period t2 ends in the button effect period, a result notification period t3 in which the effect based on the operation result during the execution period is executed is set. Here, with reference to FIG.9 (b) and FIG. 10, the presentation content performed during result alerting | reporting period t3 is demonstrated. FIG. 9 (b) shows an example of effect contents displayed during the notification period t3 as a result of the button effect, such as operating conditions during the execution period t2 (for example, pressing the first frame button 22a twice during the execution period t2 10 is a schematic view showing an example of the display mode when the) is established, and FIG. 10 is an operation condition (for example, execution) during the execution period t2 as an example of the effect contents displayed during the notification period t3 as a result of the button effect It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode when not pressing down 1st frame button 22a twice during period t2 is materialized.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period t2, the character 811 sleeping during the execution period t2 gets up, and a comment of "SP reach" is suggested to suggest an effect mode to be executed later. Is displayed. In addition, in the sub display area Ds, a “success” comment indicating that the operation on the first frame button 22 a during the execution period t 2 is appropriate is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the operation condition is not established during the execution period t2, for example, when the player does not operate the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2, as shown in FIG. The character 811 is displayed, and a comment indicating a presentation mode to be executed later is not displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "sorry" indicating that the operation on the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 is not appropriate is displayed.

  As described above, whether or not the operation during the current button effect was appropriate by changing the display mode during the result notification period t3 based on the operation to the operation means during the button effect execution period t2 (Success Can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect mode (for example, the effect mode displayed during the reach period) to be executed after the elapse of the button effect period can be varied according to the effect result of the button effect It is configured to Specifically, when the effect result of the button effect is "success", the effect mode having a low execution frequency is more easily set than when "sorry". As a result, the player can actively participate in the button effect while expecting the effect of the effect mode having a low execution frequency to be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In the button effect period, when the operation on the frame button 22 (operation means) is effectively determined (when the player can operate the frame button 22) and the execution period t2 is set, it is made to correspond to the execution period t2 Although the operation valid period t5 is set (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 8), if the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) during the execution period t2, and the operation condition is satisfied, the operation valid period at that time t5 ends (in FIG. 8, it shows with a continuous line). Then, in the difference period between the execution period t2 and the operation valid period t5, an operation condition satisfaction aspect (for example, a comment of “operation completion”) is displayed as a display aspect indicating that the operation condition is met.

  Since the period in which the operation condition satisfaction state is displayed is variable according to the timing at which the operation condition is met, for example, the operation condition satisfaction state is variably set according to the length of the display period. Also, if the display period of the operation condition establishment mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), a display to congratulate the player for the quick operation, such as “operation completed, excellent”. Set the mode, and if it is shorter than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), set the display mode to indicate that the player did not perform the operation quickly, such as "Operation complete, right?" In addition, information that is advantageous to the player only when the display period of the operation condition satisfaction mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds) (for example, the result of the special drawing lottery under execution) Suggestive information, currently set Information suggests gaming state that the player may be configured to notify the difficult special video) experience. As a result, the player can be made to operate the operating means eagerly so that the operating condition is established quickly.

  In addition, according to the timing (the timing when the operation effective period t5 ends) of the execution period t2 when the operation condition is satisfied, the effect mode to be executed later (for example, the effect informing effect as a result performed in the result notification period t3) You may comprise so that an aspect and the production | presentation aspect of the reach production performed during a subsequent reach period may be varied.

  In the present embodiment, even when the operation condition is satisfied, the result notification period t3 is not set until the predetermined execution period t2 ends (elapses). The operation valid period t5 and the execution period t2 may be ended at the timing when the operation condition is satisfied, and the result notification period t3 may be set immediately. As a result, the button effect can be quickly performed, and the effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, according to the example illustrated in FIG. 8, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the passage of time, each period set in advance as the button effect period (preparation period t1, execution period t2, result notification period) Although t3) is configured to shift, a transition condition other than the passage of time may be set. For example, it is set as a transition condition that the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period, and is determined in advance. It may be configured to shift to the result notification period t3 before the execution period t2 of the length elapses. As a result, since the result notification period t3 can be set corresponding to the operation on the operation means (frame button 22) performed by the player, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of discomfort.

  Further, in this case, it is preferable to set only the start timing of the result notification period t3 earlier and keep the end timing at a predetermined timing. As a result, when the operation condition is quickly established during the execution period t2, the period in which the display mode of t3 during the result notification period is displayed (period in which the result notification effect is performed) can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the presentation result of the present button presentation in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the end timing of the button effect period is not changed, there is no need to change the effect mode (render period) of the effect (reach effect) to be executed after the button effect period ends, and the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 It can be reduced.

  The present invention is not limited to this, and when the length of the execution period t2 in the button effect period is variably set according to the operation content of the operation means, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (end timing of the button effect period) May be configured to be different from a predetermined end timing. In this case, for example, when the length of the execution period t2 is changed to be shorter, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (the end timing of the button effect period) comes earlier than the predetermined end timing. You should configure it to By configuring in this way, since the effect period after the end of the button effect period can be set long, it is possible to execute effects different from normal, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, FIG. 7, the flow in which the button effect described with reference to FIG. 8 is performed will be described. In FIG. 6, the button effect (button effect A) set as the change effect of the special figure 1 change and the button effect (button effect B) set as the change effect of the special figure 2 change are executed at different timings Shows the flow of In the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly the third symbol display device It is configured to be displayed on the display screen of 81, and if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, or a variation pattern with high expectation of the big hit (for example, a variation of 60 seconds) In part of the case where the fluctuation pattern in which time is set) is selected, the fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the special figure 2 variation in which the lottery result is out is executed while the button effect A is set as the variation effect of the special figure 1, the button effect A (the operation target The first frame button 22a) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the button effect B (the operation button to be operated is a variation effect of the second variation (per) of the special figure 2 variation. When the first frame button 22 a) is set, the button effect B is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the contents of the effect of the button effect B set as the change effect of the second change of the special view 2 change shown in FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 11A is a schematic view showing an example of display contents displayed when the button effect B is executed, and FIG. 11B shows display contents displayed at the end of the button effect B. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. The button effect B is a button effect that can be set according to the special figure 2 fluctuation as described above with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when the button effect B is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and a character 813 imitating a turtle The effect that the player competes is displayed, and a button 812 imitating an operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated as the current button effect (button effect B) and an effective period gauge 812a are displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of “Please continuously hit the button and aim at GOAL” for displaying the contents of the effect of the button effect B is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the button effect (button effect B) of this time is a continuous hit effect that requires multiple operations (pressing) of the first frame button 22a as the display mode of the button 812 It is displayed by the continuous hit production | presentation aspect (it displays with three arrows in Fig.11 (a)) which shows that.

  In this manner, by displaying the display means (button 812) indicating the operation means and the operation content to be operated during the button effect, it is possible to visually inform the player of the game effect of the button effect in an easy-to-understand manner. Can. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, according to the operation mode to the first frame button 22a during the operation effective period of the button effect B (while the display period of the effective period gauge 812a is displayed), The display mode and the display mode of the button 812 are variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode (display mode) of the button effect being executed for each operation performed during the operation valid period, and to provide the player with a feeling of operation. Can do.

  Then, when the operation effective period of the button effect B has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 11B, the result of the competition effect between the character 811 and the character 813 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the effect result in which the character 811 has passed the goal 814 first is displayed. And while displaying the comment of "Gekiatsu" as a display mode which shows the expectation which the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) which is the object of the button effect B is a big hit is displayed on the goal 814 The effect that the character 811 has acquired the prize with the comment of “SP reach” for suggesting the effect content to be played is displayed. In addition, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "GOAL" for indicating that the button effect B is ended are displayed.

  Here, the relationship between each period set in the button effect period described with reference to FIG. 8 and the effect mode of the button effect B will be described. During the preparation period t1 of the button effect period, the character is An effect in which the character 811 and the character 813 are on standby at the start position is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a comment “Aim for GOAL” indicating the contents of the effect of the button effect B is displayed in the sub display area Ds (see FIG. Not shown). During this preparation period t1, since the operation effective period t5 is not set, the effective period gauge 812a is not displayed, but the operation target (first button 22a) of the button effect B and the operation content (continuous hitting) The button 812 is displayed in the display mode shown.

  Then, during the execution period t2, the effect shown in FIG. 11A is displayed, and during the operation period t4 set when the operation means (first frame button 22a) is operated, the first frame button 22a is displayed. An effect of changing the display mode of the character 811 or the display mode of the button 812 is displayed according to the operation mode. Finally, during the result notification period t3, the effect shown in FIG. 11B is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In FIG. 6 mentioned above, the button effect A which is a variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the button effect B which is the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 are executed at different timings. In FIG. 7, the button effect A, which is a variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1, and the button effect, which is a variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 in FIG. It shows the flow when it is executed at the timing when B and B overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 7, while the button effect A is being executed as the fluctuation effect of the first fluctuation (disengagement) of the special drawing 1 fluctuation, the second fluctuation (disengagement) of the special drawing 2 fluctuation is executed. When the button effect B is set as the change effect of the second change (displacement) of the special figure 2 change, the effect mode of the button effect A being executed is the overlap effect according to the start timing of the button effect B. It is switched to the effect mode of the button effect C and executed. Then, when the overlapping period of button effect A and button effect B elapses, button effect B is executed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery (variation) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery (variation) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) Therefore, the variable display of Special Figure 1 and the variable display of Special Figure 2 are executed simultaneously (in parallel). And since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation are set independently, the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation are related. Never have Therefore, the effect period of the fluctuation effect (button effect) of the special figure 1 fluctuation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 There may be a case in which the effect period of display (button effect) overlaps.

  As described above, when a plurality of button effects are set so that the execution periods overlap, the player can determine which button effect the operation on the operation means (frame button 22a) executed by the player corresponds to. It becomes difficult to distinguish, and effects that are difficult for the player to understand are executed. In addition, in order to solve such a problem, when the button effect being executed is forcibly ended and a new button effect is configured to be executed, the operation means is actively performed for the button effect being performed. There is a problem that the player who has operated the game is dissatisfied and the game intention is lowered.

  In addition, when other button effects are not executed during execution of the button effect, for example, the button effect being executed is a button effect with a low hitting effect (low effect effect) and the button effect Even if a button effect with a high expectation of jackpot (a high effect effect) is set during execution, a button effect with a high expectation for a big hit (a high effect effect) is not executed, and the effect of the effect is reduced was there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the button effect B is set so as to overlap with the button effect A during execution of the button effect A, a button that is an overlapping button effect The effect C is executed, and the button effect is executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player even if a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the contents of the effect of the button effect C which is the overlapping button effect will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic view showing an example of the display content displayed when the button effect C is executed, and FIG. 12B shows the display content displayed when the button effect C ends. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the button effect C is an overlapping (fusion) effect that is executed when the execution condition of the button effect B is established while the button effect A is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the button effect C is set, an effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit executes training is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an obstacle which the character 811 imitates a rock is displayed. An effect of jumping over the correspondence is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment is also displayed "Pressing a button and crossing a rock during training" indicating the contents of the effect of this button effect (button effect C). Furthermore, in the main display area Dm, in order to indicate that the operation target of this time is the second frame button 22b, the operation of the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b and the operation of the current button effect (button effect C) An effective period gauge 818a indicating the effective period t5 and the remaining period of the operation effective period is displayed.

  Here, the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81b is more than the button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a (see FIG. 11A). It is displayed in a large display manner. As described above, by changing the display mode displayed on the display screen for each operation unit to be operated, it is possible to inform the player of what the operation object of this time is.

  Then, when the button effect C ends, as shown in FIG. 12B, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode indicating that training has been successful, and indicates that the button effect B is set after the button effect C. The comment of "training success, race participation decision" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Although illustration is omitted, the display mode on the end screen of the button effect C is variable according to the operation content of the second frame button 22b during the operation effective period of the button effect C, for example, Whether or not to display a suggestion mode that suggests the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2) targeted for the button effect C is determined according to the operation content in the button effect C. In this way, it is possible to cause a player who wants to quickly grasp the result of the special drawing lottery to participate enthusiastically in the button effect.

  In the above, the effects of button effects (button effects A to C) performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. An intermediate mode of the effect mode of the button effect (button effect A) executed first and the effect mode of the button effect (button effect B) executed later is set as the effect mode of (button effect C) It is configured as follows. Specifically, in the button effect A, an effect mode that causes the character 811 is set (see FIG. 9A), and in the button effect B, an effect mode in which the character 811 performs a rail is set (FIG. 11 (a )reference). Then, in the button effect C, as an intermediate mode, an effect mode in which the character 811 who has awakened trains to the race is set (see FIG. 12A).

  In this manner, by setting the intermediate mode as the effect mode of the overlapping button effects set when the plurality of button effects overlap, the effect mode of the button effect A is not distracted to the player without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to shift to another and to enhance the rendering effect. In the flow of effect shown in FIG. 7, the remaining period of button effect B after the overlapping period of button effect A and button effect B has elapsed is the first period in which the effect mode of button effect B can be executed (for example, Since the case where it is five seconds or more is shown, after performing button production C, it is constituted so that button production B may be performed again, for example, the overlapping period of button production A and button production B If the remaining period of the button effect B after the lapse is less than the first period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the effect mode of the button effect B can be executed, the button effect B is not performed, and the button effect B is performed. It is preferable that the button effect C is executed during the set button effect period, and an aspect indicating the effect to be performed later is displayed as the effect result of the button effect C.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the button effect B is executed only during the remaining period that is difficult for the player to identify, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation target (second frame button 22b) of the button effect C, which is the duplicate button effect, is an operation target of the button effect A and the button effect B executed as a single button effect (first frame button It is configured to be different from 22a). This makes it possible to inform the player of the special feeling of the button effect C in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the button effect A is set as the change effect of the special view 1 and the button effect B is set as the change effect of the special view 2, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The first button effect is set as the variation effect of the second button effect, and the second button effect is set as the variation effect of the special figure 2, and among the first button effect and the second button effect, the button effect is executed first. The button effect A may be set, and the button effect B may be set as an effect mode of the button effect to be executed later. By configuring in this manner, even when the button effect set as the variation effect of the special figure 2 is executed earlier than the button effect set as the variation effect of the special figure 1, a plurality of Since the effect mode of the button effect can be set in time series, it is possible to execute an effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the button effect A and the button effect B are set to overlap, the button effect C is set as the overlapping button effect, but in addition to this, it is set independently. It is preferable to be able to set an effect mode in which the button effect A shifts to the button effect C as the effect mode of the button effect. As a result, when the effect corresponding to the button effect C is executed, it can be difficult to understand whether or not the current effect is the duplicate button effect, so the button effect B is executed after the button effect C. The player can play the game while expecting that.

  In addition, it sets the button production A as the fluctuation production of the special figure 1 fluctuation, sets the button production B as the fluctuation production of the special figure 2 fluctuation, and sets the button production C in the overlapping period of the button production A and the button production B In the machine 10, if the timing to switch the effect mode of the button effect (the timing to shift from the button effect A to the button effect C, the timing to shift from the button effect C to the button effect B) is different from the timing to stop the special figure fluctuation You should set it to

  Specifically, the operation effective period of the button effect C and the operation effective period of the button effect B (see FIG. 7) are set so as to straddle the stop timing of the special figure 1 variation to be the object of the button effect A. Good to configure. By configuring in this manner, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the special figure fluctuation to be the target of the button effect is switched during the series of button effects executed in the order of the button effects A, C, and B. It is possible to perform button presentation without a sense of incongruity as if a predetermined predetermined button presentation has been performed for one special figure fluctuation.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 According to First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37, setting of display in the second symbol display device (not shown), and third symbol display device 81 Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set display and the like.

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first used for setting the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for the variation pattern selection of the normal symbol The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 53) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first entrance 64b1 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) in the RAM 203, and four holding areas (holding A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second left ball entrance 64b2 and the second 1 Special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, according to the ball entering timing to the first ball entrance 64b1, first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored respectively.

  And, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is satisfied, various values stored in the first holding area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are the first special symbol Shifting to the execution area, special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started.

  Similarly, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is matched with the left second entrance 64b2 and the entrance timing to the second entrance 640, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type The respective values of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.

  Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area , Special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started.

  As described above, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. Each holding ball storage area (the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, it is possible to promptly execute the next special symbol variation.

  Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, a normal symbol hold corresponding to the ball entering (passing of a ball) to the through gate 67 consisting of four hold areas (first to fourth hold areas) as in the special symbol described above A ball storage area 203c is provided, and each value of the second random number counter C4 and the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

  Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and various items are stored. The normal symbol variation based on the value is started.

  In the present embodiment, each counter value (each counter value related to the special figure 2 lottery) acquired based on entering the left second ball entrance 64b 2 and the second ball entrance 640 is stored. And, although it has composition which holds and stores each counter value acquired based on ball having passed through gate 67, it is not limited to this, and each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) Alternatively, it may be configured not to provide a function (pending storage function) for storing each counter value acquired.

  By configuring in this manner, in order to execute the advantageous lottery in the gaming machine, the lottery that is advantageous to the player as the lottery of one special symbol type is switched to the lottery that is disadvantageous according to the set gaming state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state where a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol have been acquired.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 499 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 499). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 499, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is the first entrance 64b1 or the left second entrance 64b2, and the second It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b at the timing of entering the second entrance 640. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a). FIG. 15A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be a big hit are defined in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) .

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0, 1" is defined as the jackpot determination value The other values are defined as determination values other than the jackpot (ie, out).

  In addition, when the high probability state (certain variation state, latent state) of the special symbol is set, “0 to 9” among the values of the random number counter C1 per first is specified as the jackpot determination value, Values other than the jackpot are defined as judgment values other than the jackpot (i.e., out). That is, in this embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is defined that the jackpot is won with the probability (1/250) of 2/500, and the high probability state of the special symbol is If set, it is defined that the jackpot will be won with a probability (1/50) of 10/500. Therefore, the game state in which the high probability state is more likely to win the jackpot is easier than the low probability state of the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same probability in the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol, but the invention is not limited thereto. The jackpot probability may be configured to be different depending on the type of symbol, and for example, the second special symbol may be configured to lower the jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is prepared in two types, a high probability state and a low probability state, it may be one type or three or more types. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be configured to be different for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states can be set, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and different jackpot probabilities may be set for each state.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that it may be judged to be either a big hit or a loss as a lottery result of a special symbol, it does not restrict to this, a lottery result is not a big hit (it is out) In a part of the case, the player may be configured to win a small hit with a small bonus (for example, the number of prize balls that can be given during a hit game) that can be given to the player rather than the jackpot. In this case, for example, the value of the first random number counter C1 may be referred to also when determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol has won a small hit. The value of the random number to be a small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified in the small hit random number table When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes a small hit, it determines as a small hit of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, it is configured such that the first hit random number counter C1 value to win the big hit and the first hit random number counter C1 value to win the small hit are different, and one time the process of executing the lottery of the special symbol In the process of determining (1), the jackpot success judgment and the small hitting success / failure judgment are executed continuously (simultaneously).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot or small winning lottery with a predetermined probability with respect to one acquired counter value (the first random number counter C1 value).

  In addition, in the gaming machine provided with a small hit as a lottery result of the special symbol, the probability of winning in the small hit is defined differently by the lottery of the first winning special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. It is good. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the benefits to be given to the player between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous.

  Also, as described above, the table (first hit random number table 202a) referred to when executing the big hit lottery and the table referred to when performing the small hit lottery (small hit random number table) are separately provided. It may be configured such that a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery may be executed using one table (for example, the first random number table 202a). In this case, for example, the first hit random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of the counter value for which the small hit is won for each type of the special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination of the big hit is performed according to the determination value defined in advance according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the type of the special symbol in this embodiment. Although the configuration is as described above, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the determination of the big hit may be executed using different determination values according to the set gaming state, or until the predetermined condition is established. The value of the first random number counter C1 defined as the jackpot win may be varied according to the number of jackpot wins within the specific period, or may be executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is established. As a data table for an abnormal time to be referred to in the large jackpot lottery, a data table in which the determination value corresponding to the large jack may not be defined may be provided.

  Moreover, although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, And, it is controlled so that the jackpot game is not executed simultaneously (in parallel) based on both of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, when each special symbol duplicates and performs big hit variation, one big hit of which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit is made effective earlier, and the other big hit is won. Is configured to discard (erase).

  In addition, the structure which prevents a big hit game from being duplicately executed based on the lottery result of each special symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and for example, a jackpot is won in the lottery of one special symbol, During the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, it does not define the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, but corresponds to the jackpot so that the jackpot will not be won in the drawing of the other special symbol. You may be comprised so that the lottery of a special symbol may be performed with reference to the data table for exclusive use which defined only the determination value.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is the first entrance 64b1 or the left second entrance 64b2, And it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entrance 640.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot is won by referring to the jackpot type selection table 202d using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2.

  Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, random number values for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is won are defined using the acquired value of the first punch type counter C2.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot type selection table 202d determines the jackpot type in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) table 202d1 for the special figure 1 and the second special symbol (special figure 2) And the special drawing 2 table 202d2 for determining the jackpot type in the drawing of.

  First, referring to FIG. 16B, it is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special view 1 table 202d1. The special drawing 1 table 202d1 is a table referred to in the drawing of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16B, the special drawing 1 table 202d1 defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the acquired value of the first collision type counter C2.

  Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first type counter C2 is "0 to 19". In the range of "20 to 79", "big hit B" is defined, and in the range of "80 to 99", "big hit C" is defined.

  Here, the opening operation in the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) to be executed according to the jackpot type, that is, the operation content for a plurality of movable members (opening and closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the like) executed during the jackpot game The timing, the number of times) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 as an open operation scenario which defines the time series.

  Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 53) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

  As described above, by using the opening operation scenario in which the operation contents of the movable member during the big hit game for moving the movable member are defined in time series, the operation control on the movable member can be centrally managed. In the present embodiment, although the movable member open operated as a big hit game uses the configuration of one (variable winning device 65), the present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of movable members can be played during one big hit game. The opening operation may be performed on (the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device). In this case, as described above, by setting the opening operation scenario and centrally managing the operation control for each movable member, for example, each movable member is different from the case where the operation control is separately performed for each movable member. It is possible to properly set the operation timing of the above, and to smoothly execute the operation processing on another movable member in the case where a failure occurs in one movable member.

  The “big hit A” is a big hit type in which a big hit game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacher) 65 is opened in 16 rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a big hit game. This round game is a game in which the variable winning device (first attacher) 65 is continuously opened until the ball gets 10 balls or the opening period passes 30 seconds.

  Also, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the big hit game (time counter 203h is set to 70), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set ( The probability change counter 203g is set to 70). In other words, after the jackpot game based on the "big hit A" is performed, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), special symbol variation is executed 70 times, or special symbol It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the variation is executed 70 times.

  The "big hit B" is a big hit game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four, and the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened. When the big hit game based on "big hit B" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time reduction counter 203h is set to 70) after the big hit game ends, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set (probability change Counter 203g is set to 70). In other words, after the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is performed, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), special symbol variation is executed 70 times, or, special symbol It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the variation is executed 70 times. In addition, "big hit B" is the same as "big hit A" but the gaming state set after the big hit game is the same, but the number of rounds (round game number) is small, so compared with "big hit A" Become a disadvantage jackpot game.

  In "big hit C", the big hit game of round game 1 is executed in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened in four rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a big hit game. It is a jackpot type. When the big hit game based on "big hit C" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the big hit game (time counter 203h is set to 70), and the low probability state of the special symbol is set (probability change Counter 203g is set to 0). That is, after the big hit game based on "big hit C" is executed, the special symbol variation is executed 70 times, or the special symbol variation is executed 70 times, or the special symbol low / high probability condition, the normal symbol high probability condition is executed. It is set until the jackpot is won by 70 times when the symbol variation is executed. Therefore, when compared with "big hit A" or "big hit B", it becomes a big hit game which is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is executed to open the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 for the number of rounds according to the jackpot type regardless of which jackpot type is won However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided, and the variable winning device determined for each winning jackpot type may be opened for the number of rounds. By configuring in this manner, various game characteristics can be provided to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot, it is configured to set the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, the player hit the jackpot Not only the player is expected to play a game by expecting to be elected, but he can also be interested in the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won.

  Although three types of jackpots are used in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto, and two or less types may be used, or four or more types may be provided. Further, different jackpot types may be selected even if they have the same value of the first hit type counter C2 according to the gaming state at the time of winning. By configuring in this way, for example, when the gaming state at the time of winning is a jackpot in a definite change state, by setting a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is executed more, the hit in the definite change state is more Can make people expect. Therefore, the hit in the high probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the convenience of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can strongly feel that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection ratio (allocation ratio) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first corresponding to each jackpot type Although only the range of the hit type counter C2 is configured to be different, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be differentiated. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the fraudulent act of aiming at a specific counter value and acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 is executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16C, contents defined in the special view 2 table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 16C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special view 2 table 202d2. The special drawing 2 table 202d2 is a table to be referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16C, the special drawing 2 table 202d2 defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the acquired value of the first collision type counter C2.

  The special drawing 2 table 202d2 is different from the special drawing 1 table 202d1 in that it is referred to in the drawing of the second special symbol, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2) In the range of "0 to 49", the value of the first type counter C2 defines "big hit A", and the range of "50 to 79" defines "big hit B" In the range of "80 to 99", "big hit C" is defined in that it is defined.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the "big hit A" which is most advantageous to the player is more easily selected in the case of winning the big hit in the special figure 2 than in the case of winning the big hit in the special figure 1. ing. Thereby, the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery can be performed in parallel, and in the normal state, in the pachinko machine 10 that can execute both special figure lottery equally, the advantage of each special figure lottery The degree can be different. Therefore, when the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, it is possible to have an interest as to whether the special figure type for which the jackpot is elected is the special view 1 or the special view 2.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short time deviation, long time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 17) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is done.

  Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is used in the normal table 202e1 used in the state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, and in the state in which the definite change state or the time saving state is set. A probability change / latency confirmation table 202e2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used to select the variation pattern is made different according to the gaming state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is made different. be able to.

  Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic view showing the contents defined in the ordinary table 202e1 in a schematic view. The normal table 202e1 is a data table to be referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the second special symbol is used for the fluctuation time set for the first special symbol lottery. It is specified that the fluctuation time set for the lottery is long.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". The normal jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of “51 to 100” and the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is associated with the range of “51 to 100”. A super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with a range of “150”, and a super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern C with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with a range of “151 to 198”. It is done.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns with a lottery result of “big hit (per one)” and fluctuation time of 60 seconds (Super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A, B, C ) Provided. This is because, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating each type, the effect mode of the variation effect is set differently according to the variation pattern type indicated by the received command. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special figure lottery in which the lottery result and the variation time are the same, plural types of variation pattern types can be set on the main control device 110 side, and based on the set variation pattern types The sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to set the effect mode of the variable effect. As a result, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the fluctuation effect by the combination of a plurality of parameters, it is possible to set a more versatile effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Also, when the lottery result is "out of place" and the number of pending items is within the range of 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 70" and the variation time is out over 20 seconds with a variation time of 20 seconds A pattern is defined in association, a normal reach out variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with a range of “71 to 150”, and a super reach out of variation range of 60 seconds is defined in a range of “151 to 198” Variation patterns are defined in association with each other.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out of place" and the number of pending items is 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a range of "0 to 70" with a short time variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds. Specified, the long-term fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated with the range of "71-130", and the normal reach out fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is correlated with the range of "131-170" In the range of “171 to 198”, a super reach out variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range “171 to 198”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different fluctuation patterns are selected even when the same value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired when the lottery result is "off". Specifically, a variation pattern with a long variation time is specified to be more easily selected when the number of reservations is small compared to when the number of reservations is large, and compared with the case where the number of reservations is short when the number of reservations is large, It is specified that those with short fluctuation time are easily selected. By configuring in this way, when the number of holding balls is small, the number of holding balls is immediately digested, and the period during which the lottery is not performed increases to prevent the player from being bored with the game early. Can. In addition, when the number of holding balls is large, it becomes difficult for the number of holding balls to reach the upper limit value, and the player has many opportunities to fire the ball continuously, and prevents the player from being bored with the game early. Can.

  In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) which is advantageous to the player. Different fluctuation pattern tables may be used in the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating the other jackpots (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the other jackpot is elected is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won It is good to constitute so that a change pattern of time may become easy to be chosen. As a result, since the longer the fluctuation time set to the fluctuation pattern to be executed can be expected for the game result to be advantageous to the player, the player is made to be interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the large jackpot is won normally than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won It may be configured as described above, whereby a player can be provided with surprising game results when winning a big hit in a short fluctuation time, even if a short fluctuation time is selected. , Can be expected to the end.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation / time reduction table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the table 202e2 for probability variation / time reduction, the variation pattern is defined in association with the range of the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0-198". A normal jackpot variation pattern A having a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the entire range. Also, in the case of "out of phase", a short out transition fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "0 to 79" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a fluctuation time in the range of "80 to 198" A 180 second long deviation variation pattern is defined in association.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 has a fluctuation time of 5 seconds within the range of "0 to 149". A short jackpot fluctuation pattern is defined, and a super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range of “150 to 198”. Also, in the case of "outside", the short-circuit outlier fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined in the range of "0 to 179" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time in the range of "180 to 198" A 30-second super reach out fluctuation pattern is defined in association.

  As described above, during a definite change state or during a time saving state (during right hitting game), a shorter changing time as a changing time of the second special symbol is easier to be set than in a normal state (during left hitting game) It is configured. Further, during the definite change state or the short time state, the electric symbol 640 a is easily released because it is a high probability state of the normal symbol, and it becomes a game state where it is easy to acquire a new special view 2 suspension. Therefore, during the time saving state, the special figure 2 reserve can be easily stored, and a short variation time can be easily set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation, and the special figure 2 variation can be efficiently executed.

  Also, the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is configured to overlap with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol By grasping, it may be made difficult to easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the definite variation state. In addition, you may comprise so that the fluctuation time which a player can discriminate | determine not only this but which game state is set may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal start port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by, it determines with a hit of a normal symbol (the 2nd symbol). Also, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for low probability of a normal symbol and one for high probability with a high probability of being a hit of a normal symbol from the low probability, and is included in each The number of random numbers to be jackpots is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  The contents defined in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the obtained per second random number counter C4 is defined within the range of "0 to 10", and the common symbol is defined, and the high probability of the normal symbol In the case of the state, the obtained per second random number counter C4 is defined within the range of “0 to 231” for the common figure.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  The common pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the common pattern variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined with reference to the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 using the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 acquired It is configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, contents defined in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 20, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0-198". Be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained is in the range of "0-198", the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set to be set. doing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is configured to be varied based on the gaming state of the normal symbol and the value of the common pattern variation type counter CS2 in this embodiment, and is set. It is configured to vary the ease of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 depending on the fluctuation time. Thereby, in each gaming state, since it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol which is easy to obtain the lottery result which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive benefit. Can.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 4, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 53), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 is a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, Second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time reduction counter 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, special figure 2 big hit flag 203j, gaming state storage area 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation A stop flag 203o, a special figure 1 variation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 variation time counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z are provided.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 (up winning prize) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) Storage area for storing the In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the ball enters the left second entrance 64b2 or the second entrance 640 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the start winning).

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, it is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and for details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( Not shown).

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is started The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entrance 64b1 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the MPU 201 detects each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 from the counter buffer. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the left second ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, each from the counter buffer The values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are obtained and stored in the corresponding areas (not shown) in the same manner.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), in order to execute processing such as the jackpot lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, One of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above The data corresponding to the winning is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is each second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and each of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2. It is a storage area in which a value is stored. When MPU 201 of main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer is detected from the counter buffer The value of the common figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding ball is stored in the order of passing through to the through gate 67 (start winning), from among the holding areas where the data are available, from the earliest holding area to be digested .

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of the starting winning a prize, each counter value is stored in the normal design holding ball execution area (not shown) It is a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery or setting of display of the second symbol display device, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball Among the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the storage area 203c (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the general drawing fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting winning combination is this ordinary symbol Shift to the holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e are first inputs detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (based on the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the second opening 64b1 or the left second entrance 64b2 or the second entrance 640 It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect) up to four times each. In the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S2301 of FIG. 52) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of holding balls) is the first special symbol holding ball storage based on the ball entering the first entrance 64b1 (start winning combination) When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  Also, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (ie, the number of holding balls) is based on the ball entering the left second ball entrance 64b 2 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning prize) When the counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 sets each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). When it is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is subjected to a first special symbol variation start process (figure Referring to S207 of 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 of FIG. 41), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation display effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, the ball passes through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") ) Is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of waits) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times based on what has been done. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on passage of the ball through the through gate 67. By the initial setting process (see S2301 of FIG. 52) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the normal variable display is executed (see S2005 in FIG. 49).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. A value corresponding to the type of the jackpot won after the jackpot is set is set to the probability variation counter 203g. The value of the probability change counter 203g is the game state update process (S308 (S910 in FIG. 40) of the first special symbol change start process (S207 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol change start process (S209 in FIG. 41). It is subtracted by). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (probable variation state), and the determination of the special symbol is executed with reference to the high probability table. On the other hand, if the value of the probability change counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the special symbol is in the normal state (low probability state), and the determination of the special symbol is executed with reference to the low probability time table.

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the high probability state (time reduction state, probability change state) of the normal symbols. At this time, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the short counter 203 f after the big hit ends. Then, the hour reduction counter 203f is decremented by one in the gaming state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 40). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the short time counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined as the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the success / failure determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability. Ru. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the symbol is a low probability state of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol judgment is performed with reference to the table for low probability time.

  Special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first entry slot 64b1 matches the big hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set (see S406 in FIG. 36). This special view 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S811 in FIG. 39).

  When the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends with the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i on, processing for forcibly stopping the second special symbol by the symbol is executed (see S805 in FIG. 39). . Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a defect that the other big hit game is executed during one big hit game.

  It is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the special feature 2 big hit flag 203j entering the left second entry port 64b2 or the second entry port 640 matches the jackpot determination value. In this case, the flag is set to ON (see S1006 in FIG. 42). The special view 2 jackpot flag 203 j is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S 1510 in FIG. 45).

  When the variation time of the second special symbol variation display ends with the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j turned on, the first special symbol is removed and a process for forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (see S1504 in FIG. 45). . Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a defect that the other big hit game is executed during one big hit game.

  The gaming state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set gaming state, and the gaming state (setting status of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h) set after the big hit game is over The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time shortening counter 203h is set to 0, and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more and the value of the time shortening counter 203h is 1 or more. If the value is set to 0, the probability variation state is stored, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time shortening counter 203h is set to 1 or more, the time saving state is stored.

  Furthermore, in the state where the jackpot game is being executed, the jackpot gaming state indicating that the jackpot game is being executed and the type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed are also stored. Is configured.

  Then, based on the information stored (stored) in the gaming state storage area 203k, a state command is set, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

  The information stored in the gaming state storage area 203k is configured to be capable of holding information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 52), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203k is set. As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

  In the present embodiment, a flag (special figure 1 big hit flag 203i) for showing that the special figure 1 is in a big hit change, and a flag for showing that the special figure 2 is in a big hit change (special figure Although two jackpot flags 203 j) are separately configured, it is not limited thereto, and it is possible to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the jackpot variation corresponding to which symbol is being executed can be identified You may comprise by two flags (for example, jackpot flag). Specifically, the flag consists of 2 bits, and "10" indicates that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the process of big hit, and "01" indicates the second special symbol (special figure 2) Indicates that the jackpot is in change, and "00" indicates that any special symbol is not in the jackpot change. It may be configured to set a 2-bit value.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and both of the special symbols are used as a jackpot. When the player wins, the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on which the special symbol variation has been stopped (the final display of the special symbol), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the final display of the special symbol) Depending on the jackpot type at the time of), it is configured to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out.

  By configuring in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a plurality of special symbol type lottery simultaneously (in parallel), a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and the player is simultaneously excessive. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a benefit (big hit game) is given.

  Furthermore, even if the player wins a jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player in one special symbol lottery, the jackpot becomes advantageous to the player in the other special symbol lottery until the winning result is stopped (confirmed display). It will be possible to win. In this case, it is preferable to execute a fluctuation effect that suggests that the player has won the disadvantaged winning using fluctuation time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible for the player to think that the player has won the disadvantaged jackpot, and therefore, the other special symbol lottery can be actively executed during the fluctuation time.

  In addition, a shorter variation time may be set more easily if a player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, during the fluctuation of one special symbol won in the disadvantaged, it is possible to win the advantage hit in the other special symbol lottery, and to display the result of the stop earlier than the result of the disadvantaged hit (fixed display) it can.

  In this embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i and the special figure as a jackpot flag capable of separately storing the lottery result of the first special symbol (hit winning) and the lottery result of the second special symbol (hit winning) separately. Although the 2 big hit flag 203j is used, without limiting to this, the big hit flag which is common with the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is provided, among the drawing of the 1st special symbol and the drawing of the 2nd special symbol Alternatively, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot flag may be set to ON, and the other special symbol lottery performed with the jackpot flag set to ON may not win the jackpot.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag for showing that the big hit game of the first special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, It is set to ON when the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. The special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 39). When it is determined that the special figure 2 is moving (S802 in FIG. 39: Yes), it is set to ON (see S803). In addition, in the process of S902 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S209 of FIG. 41), it is set to OFF.

  By using this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, it is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol which is forcibly displayed in the stop symbol by the moment when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed again.

  In addition, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the processing relating to the first special symbol is performed within one special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 34), the processing relating to the second special symbol Is configured to execute fluctuation processing for each special symbol without delay.

  Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 34), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the main hit control process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 53) (S2404 in FIG. 54) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) is to skip the special symbol variation process (S203 to S212 in FIG. 34) when the present is a big hit state (S201 in FIG. 34: Yes). It is composed of

  That is, in the present embodiment, while the big hit game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a new special symbol fluctuation (lottery) is not executed, but the special symbol fluctuation processing (figure When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed in advance in S104 of 34)), the special symbol variation In the process (see S104 of FIG. 34), a new variation process is performed on the second special symbol.

  In this embodiment configured in this way, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, It is possible to suppress that a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 34).

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37). A value indicating the time of fluctuation is set (see S509 in FIG. 37). Then, every time the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see S204 in FIG. 38) is executed, the value is updated (subtracted), and is the value 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)? Is determined (see S205 in FIG. 34). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S205 in FIG. 34: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol during fluctuation ( 39) is executed.

  Furthermore, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating disengaging at the time of the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, and it is forcibly After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the value left in the special view 2 fluctuation time counter 203s.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 43). A value indicating the time of fluctuation is set (see S1209 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the second special symbol variation in progress processing (see S210 in FIG. 44) is executed, and is the value 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)? Is determined (see S211 in FIG. 34). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S211 in FIG. 34: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the second special symbol in fluctuation ((2) 45) is executed.

  Furthermore, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S806 in FIG. 39). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating detachment when the first special symbol big hit is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, and it is forcibly After the stop display, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special view 2 fluctuation time counter 203s.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65b of the specified winning opening 65a as an axis A solenoid 209 is connected to the front side and includes another solenoid 209z including a large open port solenoid for opening and closing drive, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208 Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the player operates the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). When operated, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach, and , And instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a button effect selection table 222b.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types of fluctuation patterns (such as out-of-range, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) are respectively set to counter values for selecting fluctuation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  Here, part of the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic view schematically showing a part of contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the information (variation time, result of the pass / fail determination) included in the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is made to correspond to the acquired value of the effect counter 223u. The effect content (render pattern) of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  Specifically, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is normal reach (30 seconds) and the result of the determination of success is a hit, the value of the first effect counter 223 u is "Effect A" is specified in the range of "0 to 49", "Effect B" is specified in the range of "50 to 89", "Effect C" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the pass / fail judgment result is When out of the range, the value of the first effect counter 223u is in the range of "0 to 79", "effect A" is in the range of "80 to 94", the range of "effect B" is in the range of "95 to 99" "Direction C" is defined in.

  In addition, when the information included in the variation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is super reach (60 seconds) and the result of the determination of acceptance is a hit, the value of the first effect counter 223 u is “0 "Super effect A" is in the range of "29", "Super effect B" is in the range of "30 to 79", and "Super effect C" is in the range of "80 to 99" If the value of the first effect counter 223 u is in the range of “0 to 49”, “super effect A” is in the range of “50 to 89”, and “super effect B” is in the range of “90 to 99”. "Super production C" is defined in the range of "."

  Finally, when the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the audio lamp control device 113 is out of a long time, the value of the first effect counter 223u falls within the range of “0 to 89” “out effect A”. However, “off effect B” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  As described above, when the variation pattern selection table 222a has the same information indicating the variation time included in the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the same type is used regardless of the result of the pass / fail determination. It is specified that the effect pattern of is selected, and the selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different based on the result of the judgment of acceptance. As a result, the degree of expectation of the jackpot win can be made different depending on the type of effect pattern to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which effect pattern of the effect content of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol to be executed is based on which effect effect can be enhanced.

  Here, for each effect pattern (“effect A”, “effect B”, “effect C”,...) Defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222 a, the type of notice effect to be executed or the frame button 22 The presence or absence of the operation effect (button effect) for operating the, and the effect mode of the reach effect are set in association with each other. In the present embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are described with reference to FIG. 23, although only a part necessary for explaining the contents of the button effect selection table 222b described later is described. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the effect patterns further subdivided according to the received fluctuation pattern command are defined so as to be selectable, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The button effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the content of the button effect according to the determination result of the current lottery and the change pattern type. Here, the prescribed contents of the button effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the button effect selection table 222b stores button effect information indicating various button effects corresponding to the effect pattern (effect type) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a. . As button effect information, button effective period start timing information indicating a period until special operation fluctuation period (button effective period) corresponding to the button effect is set after the start of the special figure fluctuation is set during the button effect The effective period information indicating the length of the operation effective period (button effective period), the priority information for indicating the execution priority of the button effect, and the button effect information indicating the effect content (mode) of the button effect It is specified for each effect type.

  Specifically, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is “effect A”, “super effect A”, or “off effect A”, the button effect information is It is defined that no button effect is executed. When the effect type is "effect B", "10 seconds" as the button effective period start timing, "5 seconds" as the effective period, "2" as the priority, "A" as the effect mode of the button effect It is done.

  Here, the priority of the button effect will be briefly described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). It is configured to be able to set a fluctuation effect corresponding to each special figure fluctuation. In the gaming machine configured as described above, a plurality of button effects are set according to a plurality of different triggers (a trigger for setting a fluctuation effect of special figure 1 fluctuation, a trigger for setting a fluctuation effect of special figure 2 fluctuation). In some cases, a plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, and when the operation means (frame button 22) is operated, it is difficult to know which button effect corresponds to, and the game intention is reduced There was a problem that.

  Moreover, in order to solve a problem mentioned above, in order to set a plurality of button effects without overlapping the execution timing, it is necessary to centrally manage a plurality of button effects set at different timings. There is a problem that the processing load of 113 increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, priority is given to the button effect to be executed, and when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effect with high priority is executed. doing. As a result, even if the button effect is set so that the execution timings overlap, only the button effect with a high priority is actually performed, so that an effect that is easy to understand can be provided to the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to centrally manage settings of a plurality of button effects set at different occasions, it is possible to solve the problem that the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the same priority is given in advance to button effects that have no problem even if they are simultaneously executed, so that a plurality of button effects of the same priority can be stored. Configured. As a result, since the execution timing can be made to overlap for the duplicate button effects, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising new effect and enhance the effect.

  Here, the contents of the button effect to which the same priority is given will be described. In this embodiment, as the effect mode of the button effect, the display range of the button effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operation target (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the operation content (one Define the button effects that can be performed simultaneously (overlaps) according to the times of pressing, continuous hitting, and long pressing), and set the same priority to the button effects that can be executed simultaneously (overlaps) It is configured as follows.

  Specifically, in the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5) is the display area, and the button effect for which the first frame button 22a is the operation target and the sub display Even when the button effect using the area Ds (refer to FIG. 5) is performed as an overlapping display area, the operating means (operation object) which becomes the operation target of each button effect while the player grasps the contents of each button effect Since it is possible to operate the frame button 22), it is possible to duplicate button effects.

  In addition, for each button effect that the display area is different and the operation target is the same, if the operation content is the same, the display is performed in the different display area by performing the same operation (for example, the continuous hitting operation) on the operation target Since it is possible to develop each of the performed button effects, it is possible to duplicate button effects. On the other hand, each button effect with different display areas, the same operation target, and different operation content can not be repeated (difficult) because the player can not operate the operation means for each button effect. It becomes a button effect. Further, even when the display areas overlap, it is difficult to make the player grasp the effect mode (display content) of each button effect, so that it is impossible to overlap (hard) button effects.

  In addition, it is not necessary to set the same priority to all of the combinations of the above-described overlapping button effects, for example, additional benefits provided by executing the button effects (for example, the pachinko machine 10 To the privilege to variably operate the decoration variable member that is provided and can change (move) the variable (movable) from the predetermined first position to the second position, and the privilege indicated by the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) Accordingly, even if the button effect can be duplicated, priority may be given.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of button effects set based on one trigger (for example, a trigger for setting the change effect of the special view 1) are configured to be able to be overlapped. Among them, the first button effect to be executed first is configured to have higher priority than the second button effect to be executed later. Then, the first button effect described above is configured so that the player can end the operation before the start timing of the second button effect described above by positively (early) operating the operation means. ing.

  By configuring in this way, the second button effect is not executed if the first button effect with high priority is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, and the first button effect with high priority is executed If it is not inside, the second button effect can be performed. Therefore, since the presence or absence of execution of another button effect is variable according to the operation content of one button effect, it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In addition, when using such a configuration, the second button effect with lower priority has a merit that is more valuable to the player than the first button effect with high priority (for example, it is usually viewed It is preferable to be configured to be able to play a bonus video that can not be played, to notify the current gaming state, or to issue a bonus to report the result of the special figure change being executed. In this way, by setting the privilege button effect that can be given a valuable benefit to the player as the button effect with low priority to be executed, the other button effects and the execution period overlap, The frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated while other button effects are being executed, aiming to suppress the benefit button effect from being performed.

  In addition, it is preferable to provide a suggestion (notification) means capable of suggesting (informing) the player that the privilege button effect has been set internally until the execution timing of the benefit button effect arrives. By configuring in this way, it is suggested (informed) that the privilege button effect is set by the suggestion (informing) means, and the benefit is given at a predetermined timing unless the other button effect and the execution timing overlap. It can be easily grasped that the button effect is performed. Further, the frame button 22 can be positively operated so that the execution period of the other button effects to be executed after the notification is as short as possible.

  Referring back to FIG. 24, the specific contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b will be described. When the effect type (effect pattern) is "effect C", a plurality of button effects are defined, and for the first button effect to be executed earlier, "10 seconds" as the button effective period start timing, "5 seconds" as the effective period, "1" as the priority, "A" as the effect mode of the button effect, and "14 seconds" as the button effective period start timing for the second button effect to be executed later, "3 seconds" is defined as the effective period, "2" as the priority, and "C" as the effect mode of the button effect.

  Here, the button effect defined corresponding to the effect type “effect C” will be described. As described above, a plurality of button effects are defined in the “effect C”, and the difference between the start timing of the first button effect performed first and the start timing of the second button effect performed later Is specified to be 4 seconds. Then, since the effective period of the first button effect is defined as "5 seconds", the frame button 22 is not operated in a state where the first button effect is executed, and the first button waits for the effective period to elapse. When ending the effect, the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect. That is, since the first button effect with high priority is performed at the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, while the first button effect is being executed, the frame button 22 is operated to accelerate the first button effect (for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the button effective period start timing, that is, 12 seconds after the change start). In the case where it is ended, since the first button effect with high priority is ended at the start timing of the second button effect (at 14 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the second button effect is executed. Become. With this configuration, it is possible to positively operate the frame button 22 with respect to the first button effect while expecting the second button effect to be executed.

  Next, in the case where the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is “super effect B”, a plurality of button effects are defined as in the “effect B” described above. In the first button effect to be executed earlier, "10 seconds" as the button effective period start timing, "5 seconds" as the effective period, "2" as the priority, "A" as the effect mode of the button effect Is defined and for the second button effect to be executed later, “14 seconds” as the button effective period start timing, “3 seconds” as the effective period, “1” as the priority, “C” as the effect mode of the button effect Is defined.

  Here, the difference between the contents defined in the above-described "effect B" and the contents defined in the "super effect B" will be described. In the “effect B” described above, the second button effect to be executed later is defined to have a lower priority than the first button effect to be executed first, and at the start timing of the second button effect When the first button effect is being executed, the second button effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, "super effect B" specifies that the second button effect to be executed later has higher priority than the first button effect to be executed first. Therefore, in the "super effect B", even while the first button effect is being executed, the first button effect is ended and the second button effect is executed. And the production | presentation aspect of the 1st button production performed previously is prescribed | regulated that it becomes the same production | presentation aspect by "production B" and "super production B."

  That is, when the first button effect is executed, the player corresponds to the “super effect B” whether the current first button effect is the first button effect set corresponding to the “effect B”. The first button effect proceeds without being able to determine whether it is the first button effect set. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated to end the first button effect before the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is executed in any of the "effect B" and the "super effect B". "Super production B", which can experience multiple button effects, but is the button effect currently being executed corresponding to "effect B" or has a higher expectation for a big hit than "effect B" It can not be determined by the presence or absence of execution of the second button effect.

  On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first button effect so that the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, in the case of “effect B”, the second button The effect is not executed, and in the case of "super effect B", the second button effect is executed. That is, in this case, according to the presence or absence of the execution of the second button effect, whether the button effect currently being executed corresponds to the "effect B" or the expectation for the big hit is higher than the "effect B". It can be determined whether it corresponds to the "super effect B", but in the case of "effect B", the second button effect is not executed and it is impossible to experience a plurality of button effects .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is predicted that the button effect to be executed this time is the button effect set corresponding to which effect type (render pattern), and the frame during each button effect based on the prediction result It is possible to provide fun for the player to select the button operation contents by himself.

  Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is “super effect C”, “10 seconds” as the button effective period start timing, and “10 seconds as the effective period. "," "2" as priority, "B" as the effect mode of the button effect, and "off effect B", "10 seconds" as the button effective period start timing, "5 seconds as the effective period" “3” as the priority, “A” is defined as the effect mode of the button effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, various button effects can be set in accordance with the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a, so that the effect can be enhanced. it can. In addition, even with each effect type (render pattern) selected based on the variation pattern having a different jackpot expectation, the button effective period start timing of the button effect is unified, so by the button effective period start timing, the present effect type It can be suppressed in advance that what is the object, and that the effect of the button effect to be executed later is reduced.

  In addition, a plurality of button effects such as “effect B” can be set at timing when the execution period can overlap, and may be performed later according to the operation content in the button effect (first button effect) executed earlier. Since the presence or absence of the execution of the button effect (the second button effect) is variable, the player can be made to actively participate in the button effect.

  In addition, while unifying the contents of the button effects to be executed, such as "effect B" and "super effect B", the button effects (second The presence or absence of the execution of the two-button effect can be made different, and it is possible to provide enjoyment to make the player predict the current effect type.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 22 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, Special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, hold effect counter 223j, follow state setting area 223k, button effect hierarchy storage Area 223m, button valid timer 223n, special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, special figure 2 button effect flag 223q, second frame button effective flag 223r, operated flag 223s, pressing counter 223t, first effect counter 223u, second effect Counter 223v and other memory areas 223z are small It is also provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and in each of these areas The winning information is stored respectively. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223b enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the fluctuation effect (the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81)) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display) and which counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64b1, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the holding ball number is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. , The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is stored. As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the holding ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the first special symbol holding after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number-of-balls counter 223 c, the display control device 114 is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value for the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is held. The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number of balls in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 5B) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is changed while being synchronized with the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is based on the holding ball number command in which the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 with respect to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value at the time of power on, and it is turned on when special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command to notify the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol outputted from main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set as an initial value off when the power is turned on, and turns on when it receives a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol outputted from main controller 110 Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  Special figure 1 stop classification selection flag 223g is set to ON, when the 1st stop classification command which notifies change stop classification of the 1st special symbol outputted from main control unit 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  Special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223i is set to ON, when the 2nd stop classification command which notifies change stop classification of the 2nd special symbol outputted from main control unit 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  The holding effect counter 223 j is a counter for counting the number of remaining holding balls used in the holding effect. The holding effect counter 223j determines that the holding ball number is the upper limit value (S4503 in FIG. 63: Yes) in the holding ball number process (S4208 in FIG. 63) and determines that the holding effect is to be executed (S4504: Yes), the value is set to 8 (S4506), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation is started (the pending storage decreases) when the value of the pending effect counter 223 j is larger than 0 . The hold effect is executed until the value of the hold effect counter 223 j becomes zero.

  The slave state setting area 223 k is set with data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223k, the current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control unit 110 even when the power is turned on, and the voice lamp control unit 113 can distinguish the backed up gaming state.

  The button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is a storage area for simultaneously storing a plurality of set button effects, and has a plurality of storage areas. In this button effect hierarchy storage area 223m, information of the button effect such as the set start time of the button effect or the set value of the button effective timer 223n described later is stored in the storage area corresponding to the set priority of the button effect Be done. The details of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the contents of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 25, the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is formed of four storage areas (hierarchical areas), and “Priority 1” to “Priority 3” are set as the priorities at which effects are executed. It is done.

  Specifically, the first hierarchy area 223m1 in which priority 1 in which the effect is to be executed is executed with the highest priority is set, and priority 2 in which the effect is executed with priority to the priority next to the priority 1 is set. The second layer area 223 m 2, the third layer area 223 m 3, and the fourth layer area 223 m 4 in which the lowest priority 3 is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when executing the button effect, the stored information is read out in order from the hierarchical area with the highest priority, and the button effect is executed. Then, when it becomes the execution timing of the button effect, it is determined whether or not the button effect of the priority higher than the priority corresponding to the button effect whose execution timing has come this time is being executed, and the button effect of the high priority is It is configured to execute a new button effect when it is not executed. In addition, when a button effect whose priority is lower than that of the button effect whose execution timing has come this time is being executed, the button effect whose priority is lower is forcibly ended and a new button effect is executed. doing.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the second hierarchy area 223 m 2 and the third hierarchy area 223 m 3 are provided as storage areas to which the same priority (priority 2) is set, and the second hierarchy area 223 m 2 The button effects stored in the third hierarchy area 223 m 3 are simultaneously executed even if the execution timings overlap. In this embodiment, the button effect is set at different timings, and when the button effect to which the priority 2 is given at first is set, the information indicating the button effect is displayed in the second layer area 223 m 2 When a button effect stored with a priority 2 is set next, information indicating the button effect already stored in the second layer area 223m2 is shifted to the third layer area 223m3, and then Information indicating the button effect to which the set priority 2 is assigned is stored in the second layer area 223m2.

  Then, when the button effect to which the priority 2 is newly assigned is set, the storage area is similarly shifted, and the information stored in the third layer area 223m3 is deleted. As described above, when a predetermined number of button effects having the same priority (priority 2) can be stored, if the button effects having the same priority are set to the predetermined number or more, the oldest button effect is discarded. The button effect set most recently can be made easy to be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the predetermined number of button effects of the same priority (priority 2) can be stored and the button effects of the same priority are set to the predetermined number or more, the oldest button effect However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured so as not to newly store the latest button effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary to manage the execution timing of the button effect stored in the storage area and the deletion timing, so that the control process can be simplified.

  The button valid timer 223 n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (first frame button 22 a, second frame button 22 b), and has a value corresponding to the length of the operation valid period to be set. It is set. Then, the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 72) executed every one millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113. At step S6003, the value of the button valid timer 223n is decremented by one. The button valid timer 223 is configured to be able to simultaneously measure a plurality of operation valid periods. As a result, even when the button effect is executed redundantly, the operation effective period corresponding to each button effect can be properly measured.

  The special figure 1 button effect flag 223p is a flag for indicating whether the button effect is set as the variation effect of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the button effect of the special figure 1 is set If it is set to on. In this special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, the button effect is set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303 in FIG. 68), and the button effect executed in the execution timing setting process (S5405 in FIG. 69). When the timing is set, it is set to ON (see S5509 in FIG. 69), and in the special view 2 button effect setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 70) for setting the button effect in special view 2, the button of the special view 1 It is referred to when determining the effect setting situation (S5602 in FIG. 70). Then, when the information indicating the corresponding button effect is deleted from the button effect hierarchy storage area, that is, when the corresponding button effect is executed, or the button effect executed corresponding to the execution of the high priority button effect Is set to off when it is discarded (S5907 in FIG. 73).

  In this embodiment, the variable display based on the special figure 1 lottery is configured to be displayed (main variable display) using the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (3) It is configured to perform the fluctuation display (sub-variation display) so as not to execute the fluctuation display of the symbol or to be less noticeable than the main fluctuation display. Then, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined result (for example, when the jackpot is won or when the variation pattern having a long variation time is selected among the deviations), the variation display based on the special figure 2 lottery The display is switched to the main change display from the sub change display.

  The special figure 2 button effect flag 223 q is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set in the change effect of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the button effect of the special figure 2 is set If it is set to on.

  The second frame button valid flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the operation valid period (second operation valid period) for effectively determining the operation on the second frame button 22b is set, and the second operation valid is It is set to ON when the period is set.

  The operation completed flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the operation content for the operation means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, and is set to ON when the operation content satisfies the predetermined operation condition. is there. The operation completed flag 223s is determined at the timing when the execution period t2 (see FIG. 8) of the button effect has elapsed, and the result notification period t3 (see FIG. 8) according to the determination result (setting status of the operation completed flag 223s). The middle production mode (success production, failure production) is set.

  The pressing counter 223t is a counter for measuring the number of times the operating means (frame button 22) is operated during one operation valid period, and the operating means (first frame) to be operated during the operation valid period Each time the button 22a or the second frame button 22b) is operated, the value is incremented by one, and when the operation valid period ends, the value is reset to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the pressing counter 223t satisfies the predetermined condition during the operation valid period or at the end of the operation valid period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is met, the operation completed flag 223s is set to ON. Be done.

  In this embodiment, the operation count (the number of depressions) is measured using the pressing counter 223t as the operation content in the operation valid period, but the operation number (pressing) is performed as the operation content in the operation valid period It is configured to be able to determine the operation content other than the number of times), determines whether the predetermined condition is established based on the determination result, and sets the operated flag 223s on when it is determined that the predetermined condition is established. For example, in the case of having a means for measuring the length of a period (long press period) in which the operation means (frame button 22) is continuously pressed, a plurality of operation means may be provided. It is also possible to use means for measuring the order and the number of times of pressing each operation means, and means for measuring the pressing force when pressing the operation means.

  The first effect counter 223 u and the second effect counter 223 v are counters used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is formed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. Be done.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control) and the advance notice. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later in detail.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in First Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 773) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 78) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 32) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 79B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control unit 110 by fluctuation effect when the ball entering the ball entrance 64b1b2 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 77).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 27 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in Fig. 27 (c). The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 27 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect if it is “big hit of the special symbol”, and it is shown in FIG. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first ball entrance 64b1 or the left second ball entrance 64b2, the second ball entrance When the ball is detected to enter 640, the power on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power on fluctuation image resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b, as shown in FIG. 27 (b). The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the image shown in (c) is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the first ball entrance 64b1 or the left second ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the range of the rear surface image and the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c among the rear surface image will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. FIG. 28 (b) shows the back side B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage” with respect to the back side A corresponding to the “mid-town stage”. . Moreover, FIG. 29 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to "island stage".

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, as shown in FIG. 28, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on the respective back faces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back face images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 The image controller 237 is controlled such that the image on the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by setting the position between the position a and the position a 'of the corresponding back image first as the initial position of the display area. . Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29, the back image on the back E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back E, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are the third pattern in a state where the displayed position is fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, a back surface image shown in FIG. 29A is displayed as an initial back surface image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 29B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (b), a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 29C is displayed. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 29C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.29 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.29 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the initial stage "town stage", so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "town stage" is displayed. By making all the data resident in the rear image area 235 c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "Mori stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "kawa stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 29 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back surface image between FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (c) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but if doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a very large amount of RAM must be used, this may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range of FIG. 29 (a) to (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 29 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, and the back image area 235c of video RAM 235 for residence. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the change. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surfaces B to D can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to an image in a partial range is stored for the back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surfaces B to D face the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface E displays the images of FIGS. 29A and 29B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 29 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 29 (b)-(c) and 29 (c)-(a) can be completed from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 29 (b) to 29 (c) and 29 (c) Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 29A to 29B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 29 (b) to (c) and 29 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the back image thus selected be able to.

  In the back faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back face image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 26) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back faces B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b 'and the position b. Image data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the first ball entry 64b1 or the second left ball entry 64b2 and the second ball entry 640 are generated, the first symbol display device 37 also starts the fluctuation effect. Regardless of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, a main symbol imitating a character of an animal or a predetermined mark (for example, a triangular mark) is imitated as a main symbol without the numerals "0" to "9". Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol (blank symbol) is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", "girl", "monster", "rabbit" and "turtle" are displayed according to various effects. When the data corresponding to these is made resident in the character symbol area 235e, the display control device 114 responds from the character ROM 234 when the character symbol is changed based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data previously resident in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235 instead of reading out the image data anew. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect starts from now on This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town center stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "empty stage" and "island stage"). Information for specifying whether to display one or displaying a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. Moreover, when specifying to display the back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to a stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) describes the data table "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 31 correspond to each other). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 31).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31) In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 77). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S9605 in FIG. 89 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 79 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 79 (see S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9501 of FIG. 89A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 89 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 32) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later (see FIG. 32) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 79 (b In step S8303), pointer update processing (see S9205 in FIG. 88) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 32), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 32, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 79 (b Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9207 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9713 in FIG. 90). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S9714 in FIG. 90). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9802 in FIG. 92).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process (see S8306 in FIG. 79B) of the process is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The rear surface image change flag 233 w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233 w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233 w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 9001 in FIG. 85A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S9709 in FIG. 90), and is set to off when the rear image change process is performed (see S9710 in FIG. 90). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The rear image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. The flag is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear surface image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear surface image notified by the command is set to on (see FIG. 85 (a). See S9002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear face type currently set can be easily specified by the rear face image determination flag 233x.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S9221 in FIG. 86), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. Other display data tables are set to OFF when they are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8505 in FIG. 81 (a), S8705 in FIG. 82 (a), and S8805 in FIG. 82 (b)). , S8905 in FIG. 83). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (S9214 in FIG. 86), except for the finalized display data table When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S8505 in FIG. 81 (a), S8705 in FIG. 82 (a), S8805 in FIG. 82 (b), 83, S8905). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 33 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When reaching 479, 99, 239, 232) respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in accordance with the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64b1 (start winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After the through gate passing process is executed, the emission control process is then executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, special symbol variation processing (S104) which is one of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (Fig. 34, S104) performs various determinations (appropriate determinations) and determinations based on the acquired first counter symbol and the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the determination is made by predetermined control In the selected variable display mode, the variable display can be controlled on the first symbol display device 37, or various commands for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol are performed. Control for stopping or displaying in the display mode indicating the setting or the determination result (the result of the determination of success or failure) is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 34, S104) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 34, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (in a jackpot) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the present is a big hit (during a big hit) or a small hit (during a small hit). In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S202), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S201: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first special symbol changes display It is determined whether it is medium (S203). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0) (S203: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation execution process is executed ( S204).

  In this first special symbol variation in-progress process (S204), to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period when the first special symbol is varying. Processing is performed. Then, when the processing of S204 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S204) is 0 (S205), S205 When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S205: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S206), and the process proceeds to the process of S208 described later.

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S206), when the fluctuation time defined in the first special symbol in the fluctuation display has elapsed, processing to stop the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol Is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the processing of causing the second special symbol in execution to be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the removal forcibly Is executed. Furthermore, when the 2nd special symbol under execution wins a big hit, processing for erasing the information about the big hit is performed. The details of the first special symbol variation stop process (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S205 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not 0 (S205: No), the process of S206 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S208.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the process of S203 (S203: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S207). In this first special symbol variation start process (S207), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. When it is in the state where it is possible to execute the new lottery (variation), the process of performing the new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG.

  After executing the first special symbol variation start process (S207), after determining that the special figure 1 is being changed in the process of S205 (S205: No), or the first special symbol variation stop process (S206) After execution, next, variation processing (S208 to S212) regarding the second special symbol is executed.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S208). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in progress. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the process of S208 (S208: No), the present is not in the process of special figure 2 fluctuation. Then, the second special symbol variation start process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S209), and the present process is ended.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S209), if the suspension data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol suspension ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination based on the suspension data and the selection of the variation pattern Processing is performed. Further, in the second special symbol variation start process (S209), when the lottery result is a big hit, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j is set to ON.

  On the other hand, in the process of S208, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the present is the special figure 2 fluctuation (S208: Yes), the second A special symbol variation in progress process is executed (S210). The contents of the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, but the processing of the same content as the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S204) described above is to be processed Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

  Then, when the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S210) is finished, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S211), and if it is 0 (S211) : Yes), 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S212), and then this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S211 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but, like the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S206), is specified in the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When the fluctuation time has elapsed, a process of stopping the fluctuation display with a symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) In one special symbol variation processing, the variation processing (S203 to S207) related to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S208 to S212) related to the second special symbol are executed. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (variation) for each special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation process regarding a 1st special symbol may be performed prior to the fluctuation | variation process regarding a 2nd special symbol (prioritizing) in one special symbol fluctuation process. Thus, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol become the same by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, the first priority is given first. 1 Special symbol variation stop processing will be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation processing for the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variation processing for the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variation for the second special symbol The processing may be configured to be executed prior to the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

  In addition, the variation process for the special symbol type in which the lottery which is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state may be prioritized to be executed, the player according to the set gaming state In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol type for which the lottery that is advantageous is switched is switched, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type for executing the variation process. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player is eliminated (discarded) by the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation start process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S207).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303) ).

  And the number of balls holding command which showed the number of balls holding after subtraction is set (S304), the data stored in the holding area 1-holding area 4 of the 1st special symbol holding ball number storage area 203a, execution area A process of sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) will be described later in detail, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the pass / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value. Then, the game number updating process (S308) is executed, and this process is ended. In the number-of-games updating process (S308), which will be described in detail later, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h are subtracted to execute a process for updating the gaming state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203g is a value larger than 0 in order to determine whether the current gaming state is the high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol S402). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A). It is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the jackpot determination value of the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) Based on the determination, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

  When the processing of S403 or S404 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (S405: Yes), a big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203 n is configured to be capable of storing (setting) information indicating the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot, in addition to the information indicating the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, specifically, the special It is possible to set information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, the information which shows big hit with respect to the area | region corresponding to a 1st special symbol among big hit flags 203n is set.

  Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 ( S408), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S405: No), the first special symbol display apparatus 37 is set with the first special symbol out pattern (S409), and this processing ends. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, ie, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203i is set to ON with respect to the first special symbol. The first jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36).

  When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot (S501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the table 202d1 for special figure 1 (S502), and the process proceeds to the processing of S503. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the special drawing 1 lottery result this time is not a big hit (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S503.

  After the processing of either S501 or S502 is finished, next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and stored in the gaming state storage area 203k The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short time state, probable change state) corresponding to the information is read out (S504).

  Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S506).

  Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), and the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the selected variation pattern Is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r (S509), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S204) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation in-execution process (S204). In the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S207), the variation time and the display of the first special symbol in variation are updated.

  In the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S204), first, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is subtracted and updated (S701), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S702), this processing ends.

  In this embodiment, during the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation in-progress process ( 38) is executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (see S204 in FIG. 38). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S206) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S206). If the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S206) determines that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) It is a process that is executed when it passes.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process (S206 in FIG. 39) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), is the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s larger than 0? It is determined whether or not (S802). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value larger than 0 (S802: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S803), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S804).

  Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed (S805), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S806). Thereby, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in execution is stopped and displayed in the display mode (disengagement symbol) indicating the disconnection. It is possible to (fixed display).

  When the process of S806 is completed, it is then determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j is set to ON (S807), and it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j is set to ON (S807) : Yes, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203 j is set to OFF in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly displayed as being dislodged in the process of S 805 described above (S808), delete the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S809), and shift to the processing of S810. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S807 that the jackpot has not been won by the second special symbol lottery (S807: No), the process of S808 and S809 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S810.

  In the process of S810, first, the jackpot scenario won by the special symbol fluctuation of this time is set (S810), and then the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, and the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h are set to 0. Set (S811), the game state storage area 203k stores information indicating that the current game state is a big hit (during a big hit) (S812). The game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to divide and store the game state (normal state, positive change state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state related to the hit game (during a big hit), S811 By executing the process of, the gaming state (normal state, positive change state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won, and the gaming state indicating that the big hit is being stored is stored.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to determine the gaming state set at the timing of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot game.

  When the processing of S812 is finished, next, a special figure 1 determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the first special symbol is set (S813), and the first special symbol display device A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed at 37 is executed (S814), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S801 that the big hit flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S812 is skipped and the above-described S813 is performed. Transfer to processing.

  As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), processing (S810 to S814) is executed to stop the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game). In addition, if the current lottery result is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol in change is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out (S805). As described above, in the process of stopping and displaying one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot (determination display), the other special symbol in the process of moving is forcibly stopped at the same time. It is possible to execute appropriate processing for a plurality of special symbol variations to be executed.

  That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the variation process for the first special symbol and the variation process for the second special symbol are sequentially performed, the process is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol By executing the second special symbol variation process (forced stop process) within the variation process for the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing at which the variation process for the second special symbol is not executed. Since it can be done, it is possible to prevent the processing for the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

  In this embodiment, one special symbol is configured to perform a process to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol indicating disengaging at the timing when the special symbol indicating a large hit is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a big hit, that is, when it is determined that the present lottery result is a big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) (for example, In S405 of FIG. 36: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable that the special variation that does not win the jackpot be executed for the other special symbol that has been forcibly removed and stopped until the jackpot variation of the one special symbol ends. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variation of the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won by one of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the presence or absence of the big hit.

  In addition, when controlling the other special symbol variation being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, if it is during fluctuation (outlier fluctuation) to show that the lottery of the second special symbol is out, the lottery If the result is discarded and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the outlier fluctuation, and if the second special symbol drawing result is during fluctuation to show that it is a big hit (crash fluctuation), the second After the jackpot game of 1 special symbol is finished, it may be configured to execute the interruption process so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

  In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, while making the player interested in whether a new second special symbol variation is executed or the second special symbol variation being interrupted is resumed I can play a game. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol (whether interrupted or not) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the game is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. 35) and is also one of the second special symbol variation start processing (S209 in FIG. 41) described later. The number update process (S308) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this game number updating process (S308).

  In the game number updating process (S308), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 or more, that is, whether the gaming state is the time saving state (S851). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 or more (S851: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S852). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the short time counter 203h subtracted in the process of S852 is 0 (S853). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S853: Yes), it is the timing of the end of the time reduction state, so the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S854), It shifts to the processing of S855. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 or more (that is, 0) (S851: No), there is no need to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h. The processing of S854 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S855.

  After the processing of S851 or S854 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 or more, that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state (S855). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 or more (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S856). Then, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted in the process of S856 is 0 (S857). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203g after subtraction is 0, it is the end timing of the probability change state, so the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S858), and the process proceeds to S859. .

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 or more in the processing of S855 (S855: No), or if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 in the processing of S857 (S857: No) , Shift to the processing of S859. In the process of S859, a state command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the probability variation counter 203g, and the gaming state being set is set (S859), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the second special symbol variation start process (S209) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S209).

  When the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the first special symbol lottery (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36) performed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)). Determine whether or not the jackpot was won in)).

  If it is determined in the process of S901 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is selected. The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S902), and this processing ends. That is, in this embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol and the second A new second special symbol variation is prohibited from being executed after the special symbol is removed and forced to be stopped and displayed with the symbol. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing relating to the first special symbol, the control processing can be executed without causing a problem.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in the processing of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to be OFF. Therefore, the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 41) can be skipped only once by setting the special view 2 variation stop flag 203o.

  This is a lottery (first special symbol) of the first special symbol executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)) Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), if the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) to be executed immediately thereafter is skipped, then the first special symbol jackpot The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), and the jackpot game is ended by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) is not executed until it is done.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, so the control process executed by main controller 110 Processing load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (big hit), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with a missing symbol), and one of the special symbols is displayed. Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set so that new fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol is not executed until the big hit game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, fluctuation processing of the other special symbol Although the structure which skips 1 time is used, you may use structures other than this.

  That is, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (big hit), the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) is not won until the big hit game based on the big hit is finished. For example, when the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control unit 110 described later, the special figure 2 may be configured. The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be set to be off.

  By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, until the big hit game is executed It is possible to prohibit a new second special symbol fluctuation (lottery) from being executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol fluctuation start process (see S209 in FIG. 41) is executed in a state where the special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON, the fluctuation of the second special symbol Although it is constituted so that processing may be skipped, ie, it does not start a new change (it keeps the 2nd special symbol stopped), it is not restricted to this, special figure 2 change stop flag 203o is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

  In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed, the period until the specific timing in the jackpot game is reached Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed during the period until the end of the jackpot game. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

  In addition, the contents of the fluctuation processing about each special symbol mentioned above are configured to be outputted appropriately to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the contents, and the third symbol display device The variation display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display pattern of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above However, while forcibly stopping the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. If you do, use the third symbol or the fourth symbol that corresponds to the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and configure it to execute the fluctuation effect during forced stop Also good.

  In this way, using the respective symbols (the third symbol and the fourth symbol) that are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 that is easy for the player to visually recognize, the actual second special Even when the symbol is configured to execute the fluctuation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to on, that is, the first special symbol is not displayed as a stop symbol with a big hit symbol (S901: No), S903 to S910 The process of is executed, and this process ends. The processing of S903 to S910 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol holding with respect to each processing up to S301 to S308 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. 35). Ball number counter value (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the second special symbol holding ball number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, second special symbol big hit determination processing (S908), second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S909) The description is omitted because it is the same except for the changed point.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S 908) is the first special symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) described above. And other, some processing has been added.

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 42) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1001 corresponding to the processing of S401, the point that the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S409 It differs in the point which changed a subject from special figure 1 (the 1st special symbol) to special figure 2 (the 2nd special symbol) by processing of S1006-S1009 corresponding to processing of 3. The other processing is the same, so the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S906), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 43) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) in the following points. In the process of S1201 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the first special symbol lottery result) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the second special symbol lottery result), and S506 to S507 Special processing 1 fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to special drawing 2 fluctuation pattern command in each processing of S1206-S1207 which corresponds to each processing to the point, respectively differs. The other points are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S210) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation in-progress process (S210). The second special symbol variation in progress processing (S210) is updated in each processing of S1401 to S1402 corresponding to the processing of S701 to S702 with respect to the above-described first special symbol variation in progress processing (S204 of FIG. 38). The difference is that the target to be selected is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is changed to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the second special symbol variation stop processing (S212) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S212). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S212), the target of the process is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39). It is different. The other points are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and concurrently executable, as described above. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed and displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other is selected. Since the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) determines which of the first ball entrance 64b1, the left second ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640 the ball has entered (start winning), and starts When winning a prize, each counter value obtained up to the maximum number of holding (up to 4 at the first ball entrance 64b1, at the left second ball entrance 64b2 and at the maximum at the second ball entrance 640 up to 4) It is a process stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Or based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a process (so-called, pre-reading process) is executed to predict the success or failure judgment result, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. in advance . The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described below.

  In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64b1 (start winning) (S1701). Here, the entry of a sphere into a sphere detection switch (not shown) provided in the first entrance 64b1 is detected. It determines that the ball has entered the first entrance 64b1 (there has been a start winning) (S1701: Yes), acquires the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (S1702), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations for the first entrance 64b1 is currently less than the upper limit of four (ie, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first starting opening (number of drawing rights held for the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls 203a (S1706).

  Next, the first prefetch process is executed (S1707). This first pre-reading process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but the variation determination result and the variation pattern determined from the respective counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A process of determining the type of stop, etc. is executed. Although the present embodiment is configured to execute processing for determining the result of determination of success or failure, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, the present invention is limited thereto. For example, when there is a new start winning combination, the variation determination result and the variation pattern determined for all the pending storage stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, You may comprise so that the process which discriminate | determines stop classification etc. may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although the content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, without being limited thereto, the lottery right of the second special symbol (winning information) is newly acquired when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. You may comprise so that the content of may be discriminate | determined beforehand.

  And if the process of S1707 is performed, the process of S1708 will be performed next. When it is determined that the ball has not entered the first entrance 64b1 in the process of S1701 (S1701: No), or the number of pending items for the first entrance 64b1 at the current time is the upper limit in the process of S1703. If it is determined that the value is the value (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1708.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is added, the first pre-reading process (S1707) based on the information (winning information) related to the added winning is Although it is configured to execute, without being limited thereto, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1703 (S1703 : No), that is, performing the first pre-reading process (S1707) when entering the ball into the first entrance 64b1 with the number of holding balls in the first special symbol reaching the upper limit It may be configured to be able to. As a result, even in the state where the number of holding balls in the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play a game in order to execute the prefetching process. In addition, because it is possible to add value when the ball enters the first entrance 64b1 in a state where the number of holding balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to hold the first special symbol When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 in a state where the number of balls has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming intention when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1.

  Next, about each processing to S1708-S1714, it is the same as processing performed to a prize of the ball to the 1st starting opening (1st ball entrance 64b1) performed by each processing to S1701-S1707. The process of the above is different from the process performed for the second ball entrance (the second left ball entrance 64 b 2 and the second ball entrance 640), so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the first prefetch process (S1707) which is one process of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this first pre-reading process (S1707).

  In the first pre-reading process (S1707 in FIG. 47), first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch holding storage area (S1822).

  Then, if it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1823 is big hit (only low probability state big hit, only high probability state big hit, low probability state, high probability state) (S1823: Yes), big hit type The first winning command including information indicating the change pattern and information indicating the fluctuation pattern is set (S1824), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1823 is not a big hit (a special symbol is out even in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S1823: No), information indicating a deviation and a fluctuation pattern are shown A first winning command including information is set (S1825), and the process ends.

  Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is added to the information (information giving different meaning based on the result of the result of the determination of the judgment) as the common information in addition to the information for indicating the result of the determination of the result of the judgment. It is set including information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821. Then, the winning command set in the present process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110.

  On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is different from the normal color) It is possible to execute an effect (prefetch effect) that is displayed variably) or indicates a notice symbol etc. before the start of fluctuation to suggest the result of the pass / fail judgment to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the prefetching process is performed, the judgment result of the success or failure in the high probability state of the special symbol and the judgment on the probability of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each discrimination However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, even if the special symbol is in the high probability state or in the low probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit The first winning random number counter C1 may be defined, and a winning command indicating the jackpot of the special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read.

  By configuring in this way, a special prize symbol for which a pre-reading effect is not executed, since a winning command indicating a big hit will be output only when it is determined in advance that a specific big hit is made to the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of jackpot winning to fluctuation.

  Furthermore, the game state when the lottery of the special symbol based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state You may comprise so that a yes-no decision may be performed. In this case, instead of varying the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of holding balls, the determination can be made by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of holding balls at the start of the variation. When performing pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the change order until the change of the holding ball is started based on the information stored on hold.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the prize information is executed, and during the prefetching process However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information (newly stored) is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110. Even if information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the pending storage) is set as a prize command, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to predict the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the information included in the prize command received. good.

  With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 side executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be performed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is good to constitute so that it may analyze (prediction of a judgment result of a decision). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, the specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of the determination of the success or failure) is not performed, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from executing unnecessary control. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player illegally acquires the result of the pre-reading process performed without a title.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and during the prefetching process In the present embodiment, a configuration for predicting the success or failure judgment in advance is used, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the present embodiment, a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. Information indicating the prefetching result based on all the winning combination information stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a may be set as the first winning command as a result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the second prefetch process (S1714) which is one process of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this second pre-reading process (S1714). The second pre-reading process (S1714 in FIG. 48) is based on the fact that the ball enters the first starting opening (first ball entry port 64b1) as the first pre-reading process (S1707 in FIG. 47) described above. In contrast to the process of determining (prefetching) reserve data (winning information) in advance (prefetching) and performing various types of determination, the second starting is based on winning information based on the start winning at the first starting port as the target to be determined. It is only the point changed to the winning information based on the start winning in the mouth (the second left ball entrance 64b2, the second ball entrance 640), the other processes are executed the same, so detailed The description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, normal symbol variation processing (S106) which is one of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric part 64a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S2001). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), after the display showing the hit on the second symbol display device 83 is made (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the opening and closing control of the electrically operated part 64a is performed. Medium (until the end of the hit game) is included. When it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is in progress (S2001: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S2001: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). If it is not during normal symbol fluctuation, that is, if it is determined that the current normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

  If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S2005). In other words, if it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that the winning information to be used for the normal symbol variation is held on hold) is established in the process of S2004, it is reserved and stored. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning combination information, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one.

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol holding 1 to the normal symbol holding 4 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, normal symbol holding 1 → execution area, normal symbol holding 2 → normal symbol holding 1, normal symbol holding 3 → normal symbol holding 2, normal symbol holding 4 → normal symbol holding 4 etc. Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour reduction counter 203h is a value greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of a normal symbol (S2008), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined (S2008: Yes), a success / failure determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15B) for high probability time (S2009) ), Shift to the processing of S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0), that is, it is determined that the normal symbol low probability state (S2008: No), the second for low probability time Based on the hit determination value of the hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15 (b)), the result of the pass / fail determination is obtained (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

  In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined that a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "o" is the hit time. The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the common drawing fluctuation pattern using the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (is out of place) (S2011: No), a display mode of "x" which is a display mode at the time of out is set (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S2014.

  Here, the process (the process of S2014) for determining the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is demonstrated using the content prescribed | regulated to the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f (refer FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol variation is set to the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (generally reserved number of drawings), It is configured to be variably set based on. And, depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 (the length of the open period of the motorized accessory 640a per unit time) is configured to be different. ing.

  As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20). Then, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a hit game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds A game per figure is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game has ended because the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entry port 640 and the game ends, so the ball is It is configured such that it can not enter the second ball entrance 640.

  Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a hit game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds A game per figure is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67) Since the normal symbol fluctuation (30 seconds fluctuation) is being executed, the ball is configured not to be able to enter the second entrance 640 and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set If the ball has passed through the through gate 67 and reaches the second entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), the game is executed per common game The ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640.

  Thus, according to the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set, by configuring the ball entry condition of the ball to the second entry port 640, it is possible to the second entry port 640 Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily changed according to the gaming state, various game characteristics can be created.

  In addition, as described above, even if the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 without difficulty. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 even in a game state (for example, a probability change state) where it is necessary to reduce the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the gaming state of the normal symbol and the holding ball number of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, acquisition Different fluctuation times may be set based on the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is changing (S2002: No), the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), next, the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the normal symbol this time is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol "o" is stopped (displayed on). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is out, the “X” symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting display). That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S2016, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S2012 or the process of S2013. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the open / close control mode (open pattern) of the motorized role object 640a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is not a hit (is out) (S2017: No), the present processing ends.

  Next, an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized service product 640a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing (the timing of performing the processing of S2008 to S2011) at which the normal symbol judgment is performed. Normal symbol probability set in the timing to determine the open control mode (open pattern) of the motorized actor 640a by executing the success or failure judgment of the normal symbol (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the process of S2015) The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized accessory 640a is set based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) for the normal symbol and the variation processing (lottery processing) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing (for the special symbol ( The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) for the special symbol executed in parallel during the period when the variation process (lottery process) for the regular symbol is being executed, the normal symbol is determined at the timing of judging the success or failure of the regular symbol. The high probability state of is set, and the case where the low probability state of an ordinary symbol is set occurs at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized combination 640a.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of performing the normality judgment of the normal symbol, the open control mode (open When the pattern) is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the open pattern executed when the high-power state of the normal symbol is set is the long opening (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) There was a problem that would be

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the open control mode (open pattern) of the motorized combination 640a is determined, and the motorized combination is determined based on the determination result. An opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a is set. As a result, the motorized role object 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In the process of S2017, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), next, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current normal symbol. Then, it is judged whether or not the value of the hour reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0 (S2018), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0), that is, the current symbol is low When it is determined that it is a probability state (S2018: No), an open pattern "0.7 seconds × 1 time" which executes an open for 0.7 seconds once as an open pattern for a low probability state of a normal symbol It sets (S2019).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the value of the hour reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0 (S2018: Yes), 0.8 seconds of open is 1 as an open pattern for a high probability state of a normal symbol. An open pattern “0.8 seconds × 1 time” to be executed is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the open pattern (0.8 seconds × 1 time) for the high probability state of the normal symbol is more than the open pattern (0.7 second × 1 time) for the low probability state of the normal symbol. The motorized rolepiece 640a is open for a long period of time. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as the opening pattern of the motorized role product 640a, the hit game (the first game is advantageous to the player than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set) 2) It is configured such that a period in which the ball inlet 640 is in the open state is extended). Next, based on the release pattern set in the process of S2019 or S2020, the start of the open / close control of the motorized accessory 640a is set (S2021), and the process ends.

  In addition, in this embodiment, based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing to perform the normality decision of the normal symbol, the success / failure determination of the normal symbol is executed, and the open control mode of the motorized role 640a moved in the hit game of the normal symbol Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the motorized role piece 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), the present invention is not limited to this, for example The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing to set the release control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized role 640a to be moved in the hit game of the normal symbol Only when you are, it may be configured to open the motorized role 640a long, timing to perform the normality decision of the normal symbol Based on the game state is set, it may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric won game 640a.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the common drawing is determined based on the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 from the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 20, in the common pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol. Except for the positive change state (positive change: presence of power supply), the change pattern is one type, and the same change time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected common drawing change type counter.

  Next, referring to FIG. 50, the through gate passage processing executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing (refer to FIG. 33), and it is determined whether or not the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 has passed, and the second hit is made. It is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102), If it is determined that the game is in the normal state (S2102: Yes), a right-handed game is performed while the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103) , S2104.

  When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the audio lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the emission abnormality is generated in the third symbol display device 81. A first anomaly notification mode (not shown) is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is the latent It is determined whether it is in a definite state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and when it is determined that it is latent state (S2104: Yes), the second notification indicating a firing abnormality A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not a definite change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106.

  Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 A second anomaly notification mode (not shown) indicating a launch anomaly is displayed.

  As described above, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, it is determined that the right hitting game is being performed by determining that the right hitting game is being executed. The manufacturing cost can be reduced because it is not necessary to provide dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the game area beyond the variable display device unit 80). In addition, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the gaming state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed. it can.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right hitting game is being executed, but the right hitting game is being executed Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with such an intensity (operation amount) that the ball is emitted to the right strike area May be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. When the processes of S2102 to S2103 are finished, the process of S2104 is next executed. In S2104, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then, the acquired value (M) of the acquired normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of holding balls of the ordinary symbol) Determines whether or not the upper limit has been reached) (S2105).

  When it is determined in the process of S2105 that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S2107: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2105: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 1 is added (S2106), the common drawing reservation ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal pattern holding ball number counter 203f) is set (S2107), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is common The symbol holding ball storage area 203c is stored (S2108), and this processing is ended.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution to start the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2201), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 52, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 52), first, an initialization process associated with power on is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305). If not stored (S2305: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S2312 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S2312. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2313, S2314) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the start-up process, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S2313, S2314), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), occurrence information of the power failure is stored (S2305: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S2304: Yes) S2307: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S2308). Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S2309), and the process shifts to the processing of S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2310). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S2311). And, it shifts to the main processing which it mentions later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the process of updating the counter and the process upon power-off are roughly divided.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 53), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), each control of the sub side is performed on output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223. The external output processing to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, an award corresponding to the winning ball number is given to the payout control device 111. Send a sphere command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) or the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set by various processes of the main control unit 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control unit 113 by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 53), and various kinds of symbols displayed on the third symbol display unit 81 The information (variation effect, decoration effect, etc.) is set as information for setting. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then the voice lamp control device 113 is used when the special symbol is in the big hit state. The setting of the command for executing the jackpot effect, and the jackpot control process for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 are executed (S2404).

  Detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. In this jackpot control process (S2404), variable winning device 65 (hereinafter referred to as a prize opening) for each round of jackpot state Etc.), and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening etc. (variable winning device 65) has elapsed, or whether the ball has won a specified number of winnings in the winning opening etc. (variable winning device 65). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the winning opening etc. (variable winning device 65) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening etc. (variable winning device 65) is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the motor-operated part opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized part 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 (S2405). In the electric part opening and closing process, when the opening and closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the opening and closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized winning combination is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2406). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S206 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), according to the variation pattern The variable display is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) is ended Then, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is ended, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39). In the display mode set in S507 of (refer to), the stop symbol (the first symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Also in the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating the big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (disappeared symbol) indicating the removal. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2407). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S2407), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S2016 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 49), it is executed in the second symbol display device Stop the display of the stop symbol (the second symbol) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol change processing (see FIG. 49). Turn on).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S2409) If the predetermined time has already passed (S2409: Yes), the process proceeds to S2401, and the above-described S2401 and subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S2409: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2410, S2411).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S2410). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2410 (S2411). Note that, in the process of S2411, the value of the spread pattern variation type counter CS2 is also updated as in the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the general-purpose variation type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is executed that the illegal game aimed at the timing when the determination value corresponding to the win is acquired It can be suppressed.

  Further, in the process of S2408, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 51 has been executed, so the process at the time of the power-off after S2412 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S 2412), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113) And transmit (S2413). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2414), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S2415), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2408 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2407, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2410 and S2411 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S2401. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S2401. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening etc. (specific winning opening 650).

  In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, S810 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol (big hit) If the scenario is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. If it is determined in the process of S2501 that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is ended.

  Note that the opening command may be transmitted in a delayed (variable) manner according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then, the opening counter has a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A, 5000 for big hit B) If it does, an opening command may be sent. By doing in this way, for example, when it becomes a big hit in the left hitting game, time to the start of the big hit is lengthened, when it becomes a big hit in the right hitting game, time to the beginning of the big hit It can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the left hitting game, it is necessary to switch to the right hitting game as the big hit game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time for switching to the right hitting game (big hit game) when it becomes a big hit in the left hitting game. Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), it is next determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is currently being played (S2503). In the process of S2503, the discrimination is performed by reading out the gaming information on the winning game stored in the gaming state storage area 203k.

  As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is determined in the process of S2503 that the jackpot of the special symbol is not inside (S2503: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S2503: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

  When it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the process (operation process of the variable winning device 65 and the switching member 650h) corresponding to the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type To be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505) which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 54) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

  When the jackpot operation setting process (S2505) is executed, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of jackpots to be started this time is set among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the jackpots of this time. The operation scenario is read (S2641). The opening operation of the large opening is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642), and then this process is ended.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed. Further, although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S 2504 in FIG. 54: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the progress status with respect to the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 what round game is currently being played in the round game.

  In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control unit 110, the round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started without any trouble. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game, and the number of round games played this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side is May be calculated, and the display mode of the number-of-rounds display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this manner, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so the load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Referring back to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of ending effect (S2506). The start timing of the ending effect is the end of the final round (the 16th round in the case of big hit A) in the big hit game and the open / close door 65b is closed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment) When 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2506: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S2507), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2506: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2508). The end timing of the jackpot is, specifically, the end timing of the ending effect set. If it is determined in the process of S2509 that the end timing of the big hit (the end timing of the ending effect) (S2509: Yes), the big hit end process for setting the end of the big hit is executed (S2509), this processing Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the big hit end (S2508: No), the present process is finished as it is.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2512). In the jackpot end process (S2512), a process of setting a high probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed according to the jackpot type of winning.

  When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present jackpot type is a jackpot A or a jackpot B (S2701). If it is determined that the jackpot type of this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S2701: Yes), since it is a jackpot type in which a probability change state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, The value 70 is set (S2702), and the process proceeds to the process of S2703. On the other hand, when it is determined that the present jackpot type is the jackpot C in the process of S2701 (S2701: No), the process of S2702 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2703.

  In the process of S2703, 70 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2703). Then, a command indicating the change of the gaming state is set (S2704), and this processing is ended.

<About the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 76, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S4116 (see FIG. 58) is performed by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S4002). As described later with reference to FIG. 58, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S4116 when the power-off occurrence information is received from the main control device 110 (see S4113 of FIG. 58). Before the power-off process is performed, the power-off process flag is turned on, and after the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S4116 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S4116 after a momentary power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S4117. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is performed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is performed, the process of S4008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). And set the interrupt permission (S4011), and shift to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, that the start processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  When the process of S4009 skips the process of S4009 when the process of S4008 is performed via the processes of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was performed last time (S4101), and one or more milliseconds If it has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S4102 to S4110, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. Since the process of S4111 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), a command to transmit various commands to the display control apparatus 114, set in the processes of S4103 to S4113, to the display control apparatus 114 Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S4104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect process (S4107), the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, but the first frame button 22a or the second frame button 22b operated by the player to enhance the effect. (Hereinafter, when both frame buttons are generally referred to, it is referred to as the frame button 22.) It is monitored that the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed, and the setting corresponding to the effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. Processing. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are simultaneously set, processing is performed to differ the button effects to be executed according to the priority based on the information of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m. Further, when a plurality of button effects are performed in duplicate, a process for effectively setting the operation of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b is executed.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, a command determination process (S4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4112. The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S4111), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special view from the main control unit 110 Whether or not 1 fluctuation pattern command is received it decides (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying of the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time, the result of the pass / fail judgment) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (S4202), and this process is ended. The details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received (S4201: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 or not. (S4203). In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and the present process is ended. The details of the special view 2 variation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol In the case of

  When it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received next It is determined whether or not (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), a stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process ends. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4205 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: No), has the ball number command for holding balls been received from the main control device 110? It discriminates (S4207). Here, when it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the holding ball number process (S4208) is executed, and the present process is ended. Details of the holding ball number process (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4207 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined in the process of S4209 that a winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), information on the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing ends. .

  If it is determined in the process of S4209 that no winning information command has been received (S4209: No), it is next determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. The details of the state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but the gaming state (normal state, definite change state, latency) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 A process is performed to set the sub game setting area 223 k for the confirmation state) and the winning game state (medium hit).

  Next, when it is determined in the process of S4211 that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined in the process of S4213 that the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213), a display command indicating the corresponding symbol stop is set based on the fluctuation stop related command received from the main control device 110 (S4214) This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4213 that the variable stop related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the hit related command has been received (S4215) and it is determined that the hit related command has been received. In the case (S4215: Yes), the hit related processing is executed (S4216), and the present processing is ended. The details of the win-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won as a result of the drawing of the special symbol is the third symbol display device It performs processing to be performed by 81.

  In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit related command is not received (S4215: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S4217), and the present process is ended. In the processing of S4217, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command To send the display control device 114 to the display control device 114.

  The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment has been described above, but in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining presence / absence of reception for various commands An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether a state command has been received may be either a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. The determination order may be defined to be executed prior to the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

  By configuring in this manner, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 of FIG. 35) of main controller 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the gaming state has been varied is set. Also, the gaming state currently set on the audio lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special view 1 fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 side to define the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202). This special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state set. In response, processing is performed to set a display mode (main variation fluctuation pattern, secondary variation fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the display control device 114 generates the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. By configuring in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a plurality of special symbols are displayed simultaneously (in parallel), priority is given to the variation display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of any one of the special symbols. Since it can be displayed on the screen, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is set as the gaming state, the ball is caused to flow into the ball entry unit 64 (see FIG. 2), and the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port A left-handed game in which a ball is caused to enter 64b2 is played, and a special figure 1 lottery and a special figure 2 lottery are executed equally.

  In this case, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be divided equally, and the variable display of the lottery result of the special view 1 and the variable display of the lottery result of the special view 2 may be displayed together. When such a configuration is used, a plurality of variable displays (special figure 1 variable display, special figure 2 variable display) are simultaneously executed, and a variable display (outlier fluctuation) indicating that the special figure lottery result is out There is a problem that the desire to play decreases because it is displayed frequently. In addition, there is a problem that a plurality of variable displays are executed at different variable speeds, and the eyes of the player watching the variable displays get tired.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variable display indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 is set as the main variation display, displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is indicated. The variable display is configured to be a secondary change display and to be executed in the small display area Dm4 of the three symbol display device 81. Then, the special view 2 variable display in which the secondary change display is executed is configured to be switched to the main change display when the lottery result of the special view 2 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, jackpot winning).

  By configuring in this manner, it is difficult for the player to grasp out-of-range fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the secondary variation display side when the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are executed equally. Therefore, the jackpot is against the number of times of fluctuation display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (number of times of fluctuation display of special figure 1 and number of big hit fluctuation display of special figure 2) Since it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of fluctuation display showing winning (number of times that the number of big hit fluctuation display of special figure 1 and the number of big hit fluctuation display of special figure 2), it looks higher than the actual jackpot probability It can be made to think that the jackpot was won by probability.

  Further, by configuring the variable display corresponding to one of the special symbols to be emphasized and executed among the plurality of special symbols, it is possible to make the player gaze at only the variable display corresponding to the one special symbol. Therefore, the player's fatigue can be reduced.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set as the main variation display in the normal state, and the variation display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the definite change state and the time saving state. Is configured to be a main variation display. That is, in accordance with the gaming state, the special symbol to be the main variation display is configured to be variably set. In other words, when a probability change state and a time reduction state are set as the game state, a game in which the ball is made to enter the second ball entry port 640 by executing the right-handed game is executed. The special figure 2 lottery is easier to be executed than the lottery, and the special figure 1 lottery is hardly executed.

  Therefore, the special view lottery is actually executed by configuring the variable display corresponding to the special view 2 lottery (the special view 2 change display) to be the main change display during the positive variation state and the time saving state. Regardless of this, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation where variable display is not performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to occur, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  In the present embodiment, in a normal state in which a plurality of types of special drawing lottery (special drawing 1 drawing, special drawing 2 drawing) are evenly executed, variation for showing a drawing result of the special drawing 1 drawing Although the display is set to be the main fluctuation display, without being limited thereto, the fluctuation display for showing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery may be used as the main fluctuation display, or the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 Different benefits that can be awarded when the jackpot is won in the lottery (the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is different) are easy to be given to the player advantageous benefits The variable display corresponding to the special symbol on the side may be set as the main variable display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special view type to be the main change display is variably set according to the set gaming state, but the special view type to be the main change display is variable under another condition If the gaming state is such that, for example, a plurality of types of special drawing lottery (special drawing 1 drawing, special drawing 2 drawing) are executed equally, in the standby state in which the special drawing lottery is not executed It is good to constitute so that the change display corresponding to the special figure lottery performed previously may become the main change display. Thereby, the variable display corresponding to the special symbol for which the lottery has been executed earlier is set as the sub-variation display, even though the drawing condition of the special drawing drawing (start winning to the entrance) is established. It is possible to suppress that the variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the player is given a sense of distrust. Furthermore, the player may be configured to select which special symbol is to be the main variation display.

  First, when the special figure 1 change start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is set. The special pattern 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a S4303 ).

  Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S4304). If it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current state is the normal state (S4304: Yes), the display command showing the special figure 1 main variation pattern is made to make the variation display of the first special symbol the main variation display. The setting is made (S4305), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (time reduction state, positive change state) (S4304: No), the game in which the second special symbol fluctuation display is the main fluctuation display Since it is a state (because it is a gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is a subsidiary fluctuation display), a display command indicating a special figure 1 subsidiary fluctuation pattern is set (S4306), and this processing is ended.

  Here, when the display command indicating the special view 1 main fluctuation pattern is set, the command output process (see S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113 is output to the display control device 114. And stored in the display control device 114 side. When the display control device 114 receives a command for display related to the special figure 1 fluctuation while storing the command indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol display Image data is generated to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the device 81. On the other hand, when the display control device 114 receives a command for display related to the special figure 1 change in a state where the display control device 114 stores the command showing the special figure 1 sub change pattern, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol Control is performed so as not to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81.

  Thus, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, regardless of the setting status of the main variation display and the secondary variation display, a display command indicating variation effects corresponding to each special figure variation is set, and the display control device 114 side The audio lamp control is configured by generating the image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the setting status of the main change display and the follow change display, and the received display command. The setting condition of the main variation display and the sub variation display can be determined on the device 113 side, and the process of setting the display command indicating the variation effect corresponding to the determination result can be omitted, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 It can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special view 2 change start process (S4204). This special view 2 variation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state set. In response, processing is performed to set a display mode (main variation fluctuation pattern, sub-variation variation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the display control device 114 generates the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352) The detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S4353).

  Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S4354). If it is determined in the process of S4354 that the current state is not a normal state (a normal state or a positive change state), that is, (S4354: No), since the second special symbol variation display is a subordinate gaming state, A display command indicating a special figure 2 main variation pattern is set (S4355), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is the normal state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the subordinate gaming state (the variation display of the first special symbol is Since it is in the main gaming state), a display command indicating a special figure 2 sub-variation pattern is set (S4356), and this processing ends.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the change (lottery) of the first special symbol and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (parallel), both special symbols are executed. Each special symbol (the first symbol according to the gaming state being set while simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (the third symbol and the fourth symbol variation display) corresponding to the variation display of the symbol display device 81 on the third symbol display device 81 By variably setting the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence or absence of the display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation situation (lottery result and the number of times of fluctuation) The player can easily grasp the special symbol type to be watched.

  Therefore, even when a game specification in which a plurality of special symbol types execute fluctuation (lottery) simultaneously (in parallel) is used, it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

  Next, stop type command reception processing (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4206). The stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special view 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON, and the special view 2 is selected. When the stop type command is received, the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S4401). Next, a stop type (from jackpot A to jackpot C, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or special view 2 stop type command (S4402), and the process ends.

  The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special view 2 stop type command is the second special symbol The types of stop are stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change simultaneously, it becomes possible to manage the stop type respectively, and execute appropriate change display Can.

  Next, the contents of the pending ball number process (S4208) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG.62. FIG.62 shows the pending ball number process (S4208) In the holding ball number process (S4208), when the number of holding balls is the upper limit value, a process for setting a holding effect is executed.

  When the holding ball number process (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the received command (holding ball number command) is extracted (S4501), The value of the holding ball number counter (the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the current number of balls held is the upper limit (S4503). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is the upper limit value (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to execute the holding effect (S4504). Specifically, when the number of holding balls reaches the upper limit, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the holding effect, and it is determined whether the lottery result is a lottery result for executing the holding effect. When it is determined that the hold effect is to be executed (S4504: Yes), a display command indicating the hold effect is set (S4505), and 8 is set as the value of the hold effect counter 223j (S4506). . Then, the processing relating to other suspension is executed (S4507), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls reserved is not the upper limit in the process of S4503 (S4503: No), or if it is determined that the reserved effect is not performed in the process of S4504 (S4504: No) The process of S4506 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4507.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the state command reception process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command reception process (S4212). This state command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and according to the set gaming state. A process is performed to set the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 differently. The details of the state command reception process (S4212) will be described below.

  When the state command reception process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k is different from the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

  If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the gaming state after change is the normal state (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state The setting command is set (S4603), the display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), and the information indicated by the state command received this time is stored (set) in the slave state setting area 223k (S4610). finish.

  Here, when the command set in the processing of S4603 and the processing of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, the fluctuation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode and background) are set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  With this configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variation effect display for the gaming state set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set gaming state and a change pattern command (common command) corresponding to the change display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114 The display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received fluctuation pattern based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common It can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the case where display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining the plurality of commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side as described above, It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of display data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 is appropriate. There is provided a judgment means for judging whether there is any, and when it is judged that the judgment result is not appropriate, a simple display fluctuation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of display data already set are displayed. It may be configured to be rewritten to simple display data.

  By configuring in this way, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received from the main control device 110 by the audio lamp control device 113. It is possible to display a fluctuation effect display based on the simple display data. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to be played by the change effect display of contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the above-mentioned simple display data, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode of black background) which does not correspond to any gaming state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol Such display data may be used which has a smaller amount of data than display data used in normal fluctuation effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. The voice lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern. It may be configured to

  Referring back to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the gaming state after change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the gaming state after change is If it is determined that the game state is the definite change state (S4605: Yes) if it is determined that the gaming state is the positive change state (the state command received this time is the command indicating the positive change state), it corresponds to the positive change state The main display area setting command, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), the display command indicating the positive variation mode is set (S4607), and the processing of S4610 described above Transition to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4605 that the gaming state after change is not a definite change state (the state command received this time is not a command indicating a positive change state), that is, if a state command indicating a time saving state is received (S4605: No), a main display area setting command corresponding to the time saving state is set (S4608), a display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S4609), and the process proceeds to the above-described S4610.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the hit related process (S4220) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related processing (S4220). In this hit-related processing (S4220), processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won as a result of the drawing of the special symbol Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the jackpot is won is executed.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (jackpot game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and based on the accumulation result A process of setting a display award ball number command is executed.

  In the hit related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot related command (S5001). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot related command (S5001: Yes), the jackpot related processing is executed (S5002), and then the present processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66, the jackpot related process (S5002) which is one process in the hit related process (S4220 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related process (S5002), first, it is determined whether or not the win-related command received by the win-related process (S4220 in FIG. 65) is a jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S5102), and then the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the big hit start command has not been received (S5101: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S5103). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S5104), and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the round number command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In the case where information for indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted as a round update command from the main control unit 110 in order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit The round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of round update commands received is provided in the RAM 223 of the 113 when the round update command is received, and the current round on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the number of display rounds command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the display ending command is set (S5106), and this process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether the received command is a winning ball command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is not a winning ball command (S5003: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a winning ball command (S5003: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the winning ball number counter (not shown) (S5004), A display award ball number command corresponding to the value of the award ball number counter after the addition is set (S5005), and then the process ends.

  Although detailed description will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), the pachinko machine 10 received during the period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set. The winning ball number corresponding to the winning ball number command is configured to be accumulated by the winning ball number counter. Then, during the jackpot game or in the latent state, the number of winning balls according to the cumulative value of the number-of-winning balls counter is displayed.

  By configuring in this way, the ball acquired during a period (advantage duration period) until the normal state is set again after the short time state or the positive change state is set in the state in which the normal state is set. The cumulative total of the numbers can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Furthermore, the number of winning balls acquired in one game period (a combination of a big hit game period and a short time period until the next big hit game is performed or a positive change state period) within the advantageous duration period is accumulated. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing, as history information, the cumulative number of winning balls acquired in one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means as history.

  In addition, as described above, when using a configuration in which the number of winning balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become the lottery result (big hit) which becomes advantageous to the player is displayed. Or, it may be configured to display the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the lottery result (big hit) which is advantageous to the player.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous duration, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous duration, and the game is actively played Can be done.

  Furthermore, when the game content (lottery result of the special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided to execute condition achievement notification for indicating that, for example, a jackpot is won A condition achievement notification may be performed to indicate that the number of special symbol lottery numbers (so-called, number of chatteries) executed up to this point has exceeded a predetermined number of times (100 times). In addition, a condition achievement notification may be performed to indicate that the number of winning balls acquired within one advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined number (5000).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S4112). The variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the fluctuation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is performed on the first or special view 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the fluctuation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the display, a variation pattern command (effect pattern) for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit C), processing is performed to set a special display 1 for display or a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is judged whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to S5305. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to be off (S5302). And special figure 1 button production setting processing (S5303) is executed.

  Here, the special view 1 button effect setting process (S5303) which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing this special view 1 button effect setting process (S5303). In the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), a process for determining whether or not to execute the button effect as the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation this time, and a process for setting the effect mode of the button effect And is executed.

  In the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), first, the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401). When it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (a positive change state or a short time state) (S5401: No), the entire main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set as the main variable display which is the variable display, and a button effect based on the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set Since there is no need, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401: Yes), it is determined whether the special view 2 button effect flag 223q is on (S5402). The special figure 2 button effect flag 223 q will be described in detail later, but is set to ON when the button effect is set based on the special figure 2 fluctuation in the button effect mode setting process (S5303 in FIG. 71) It is. In the process of S5402, it is determined that the special effect 2 button effect flag 223q is on (S5402: Yes), that is, the button effect is set by the change of the second special symbol (the special figure 2 change) In this case, since the button effect of the special view 1 is not newly set, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 button effect flag 223 q is not on (S 5402: No), the button effect corresponding to the current special figure fluctuation is selected with reference to the button effect selection table 222 c (S 5403) . Then, it is determined whether the button effect is selected (the button effect can be executed) by the process of S5403 (S5404), and when it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5404: Yes), the execution timing setting The process (S5405) is executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the button effect is not selected in the process of S5403 (S5404: No), the process of S5405 is skipped, and the present process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 69, about the execution timing setting process (S5405) which is one process in the special view 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. explain. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this execution timing setting process (S5405). In this execution timing setting process, a process for correcting the execution timing of the button effect set in the special view 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) is executed.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), for example, the special figure 1 The execution timing of the button effect set based on the change may be the timing when the special view 2 change is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, and the button effect meaningless to the player is executed. There was a problem. In addition, in order to solve this problem, during the big hit change of the special figure 2 change, or when the information indicating the big hit is included in the reserve memory of the special figure 2, the button effect is made by the special figure 1 change If a restriction is provided so as not to execute, the frequency of executing the button effect may decrease, and there may be a new problem that the effect of the effect may decrease.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the button effect corresponding to one special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation) is set, the fluctuation state (lottery situation) of the other special figure fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) Are analyzed, and based on the analysis result, it is possible to execute a process of varying the execution timing of the button effect corresponding to one of the special figure fluctuations.

  By configuring in this way, when winning a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, the button effect of the special figure 1 lottery is executed avoiding the timing (stop timing of the big hit symbol) notifying the player of the lottery result It is possible to suppress the decrease in the frequency of execution of the button effect. In addition, when the button effect of the same mode is executed at a timing different from normal, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player and to recall a big hit (special figure 2 lottery big hit) by the oddness, so It can improve the interest.

  In the execution timing setting process (S5405), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501). If it is determined that the special drawing 1 lottery of this time is a big hit (S5501: No), readout of winning information of the special figure 2 stored in the winning information storage area 223b is executed (S5502). Next, it is determined whether or not special figure 2 prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b read in the process of S5502 includes prize information indicating a big hit (S5503). When it is determined that there is a big hit in the special figure 2 prize information (S5503: Yes), the time until the fluctuation (special figure 2 big hit fluctuation) corresponding to the prize information including the information indicating the big hit is calculated (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505.

  In the process of S5505, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is later than the start timing of the fluctuation (S5505). That is, in the process of S5505, the timing at which the fluctuation time set in the special drawing 1 fluctuation to be executed this time elapses is discriminated from the timing at which the special drawing 2 big hit fluctuation is started, and the special drawing 1 fluctuation to be executed this time It is determined whether it is necessary to correct the effect mode (execution timing) of the variable effect (button effect). In the process of S5505, the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot variation is not later than the timing when the variation time set to the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time elapses, that is, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation to be made this time When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation is started during (S5505: No), the timing when the special figure 2 big hit variation is started is within 15 seconds after the special figure 1 variation that is executed this time is started It is determined whether it is (S5506).

  In the process of S5506, when the button effect set in the special figure 1 variation is executed at the normal timing (see FIG. 24), the normal button is used to determine whether it overlaps with the special figure 2 jackpot variation. It is determined whether the effect period (10 to 15 seconds from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation) overlaps with the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation.

  In the process of S5506, when it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds, even if the normal button effect is executed, the special effect 2 big hit fluctuation is not executed during the button effect, so the button effect A period set in advance in the selection table 222c is set as a button effect execution period. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5506 that the start timing of the special figure 2 big hit variation is within 15 seconds (is over 15 seconds) (S5506: Yes), the execution timing of the button effect is corrected (variable) The processing for (S5507) is executed.

  In the process of S5507, the effect information included in the button effect is corrected such that the button effect is executed in a period before the special view 2 jackpot variation start timing. Then, the effect mode (information) after correction is set in the button effect hierarchy storage area (S5507), the special view 1 button effect flag 23 is set to ON, and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not after the variation (S5505: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit variation start timing is within 15 seconds (S5506: No), the variation start timing is 15 seconds When it is not determined that it is within (S5506: No), the button effect execution period is set in a period before the start timing of the special figure 2 big hit variation (S5507), and the corresponding area of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m The button effect information is set (S5508), the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is set to ON (S5509), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation start timing is not within 15 seconds (S5506: Yes), it is impossible to set the button effect, so this process is ended as it is Do.

  In the process of S5501, if it is determined that the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S5503 that the special figure 2 winning information does not have a big hit ( S5503: No), the execution period of the button effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation is set as it is (S5510), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S5508. Also, in the process of S5505, even when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is later than the fluctuation (S5505: Yes), the process of S5510 is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S5508.

  As described above, in the execution timing correction process (S5405) according to the present embodiment, the winning information included in the special figure 2 suspension at the execution timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the special figure stored in the winning information storage area 223b) 2) determination of whether there is winning information having information indicating a big hit among the winning information corresponding to 2), determination of execution (start) timing of special figure 2 variation corresponding to winning information including information indicating a big hit, The big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed during this special figure 1 fluctuation, or it decides the start timing of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2, and based on the result of the judgment, the special figure 1 fluctuation However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times until the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation is executed The The special figure 2 reserve number until the special figure 2 change based on the hold is executed is determined, and the big hit change of the special figure 2 is executed during the present special figure 1 change based on the determination result It may be configured to determine whether or not to

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the variation time and the special figure of the special figure 1 set in the gaming machine which can execute the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) simultaneously (in parallel). Although each special drawing lottery (fluctuation) is configured to be executed evenly without making a large difference with the fluctuation time of 2, for example, the special drawing 1 lottery (fluctuation) and the special In the gaming machine which can execute (simultaneously) (parallel to) the lottery (variation) of FIG. 2, according to the gaming state which is set, the gaming state in which one special drawing lottery is efficiently executed, and the other special drawing In order to provide a gaming state in which the lottery is executed efficiently, a long period of time (for example, 10 minutes of out-of-range fluctuation) as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation on the side which makes special drawing lottery difficult to be executed in each gaming state Has a configuration that makes it possible to set the fluctuation time of 4 minutes) In the game state where special figure 1 lottery is easy to be executed, it is only necessary to judge whether special figure 2 fluctuation under execution or special figure 2 lottery (fluctuation) to be executed next time is a big hit or not. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is to be executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation of.

  Also, in this case, in the gaming state in which the special figure 1 lottery is easily executed, the maximum time set as the variation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set if the special figure 2 lottery lottery result which is hard to be executed is a big hit It is preferable to set the fluctuation time of each special figure so as to be shorter than the shortest time among the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily determine whether or not the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is to be executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation of this time.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), next, based on the extracted variation pattern, set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol to the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol. (S5304), the first special symbol holding ball number counter is decremented by 1 (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off in the process of S5301 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 to S5305 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5306.

  In the process of S5306, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5306). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to be off (S5307), and based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, the second special A variation pattern command for display of a symbol is set (S5308), and next, special figure 2 button effect setting processing (S5309) is executed.

  Here, the special view 2 button effect setting process (S5309) which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this special view 2 button effect setting process (S5309).

  In the special view 2 button effect setting process (S5309), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S5601). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (i.e., it is a definite change or a short time state) (S5601: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (S5601: Yes), whether or not the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is on, that is, the button effect is executed by the fluctuation of the first special symbol It is determined whether or not there is (S5602). If it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is on (S 5602: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (S 5603). If it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is not a big hit (S5603: No), this processing is ended as it is not necessary to prioritize and execute the button effect of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5603 that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (S5603: Yes), or in the process of S5602, it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is not on. If it is (S 5602: No), since it is the timing at which the button effect can be set even in the variation of the second special symbol, the button effect corresponding to the current variation is selected from the button effect selection table 222 c (S 5604).

  Then, next, it is determined whether or not the button effect can be executed (S5605). When it is determined that the button effect is not executable (S5605: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the button effect is executable (S5605: Yes), the button effect mode setting process (S5606) is performed, and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a button effect mode setting process (S5606) which is one process in the special view 2 button effect setting process (S5309) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this button effect mode setting process (S5606). In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), when the button effect is set for both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the process of setting the button effect according to the priority of the button effect is performed. Execute, and if duplicate settings can be made, set a button effect.

  In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), first, the button effect information set in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is read (S5701), and then the highest priority of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m read in the process of S5701 It is determined whether or not there is presentation information in the area (S5702). If it is determined that there is effect information in the top priority area (S5702: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no effect information in the top priority area (S5702: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 change being executed is a big hit (S5703). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation being executed is a big hit (S5703: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit variation during execution is prioritized over the button effect in the special figure 2 variation, so this process is performed as it is Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change being executed is not a big hit (S5703: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

  In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the button effect of the second special symbol set this time is within the button effect period of the first special symbol (S5704). If it is determined that the first special symbol button effect period is in progress (S5704: Yes), the overlapping button effect is performed in a period in which the set period of the first special symbol pattern and the second special symbol button effect overlap. The setting is made (S5705). The overlapping button effect set here is, as described above, in the period in which the button effect of the first special symbol and the button effect of the second special symbol overlap when the variation result of the second special symbol is a hit. Set button effect C. By configuring in this manner, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5704, when it is determined that the button effect period of the special figure 1 is not during the button effect execution time (S5704: No), the button effect is set in the highest priority area (S5706), S5707 The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect process (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and effect process (S4107) is executed in the main process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for starting or performing an effect using the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b. Run. In the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S4107), first, a button effect start process (S5801) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a button effect start process (S5801) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this button effect start process (S5801). In this button effect start process (S5801), each button effect information stored in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is read, and when it is the start timing of the button effect, a process for executing the button effect is executed. Ru. Further, when the button effect of the highest priority (priority 1) is executed, a process for discarding the button effect being executed is executed. By executing such processing, it is possible to appropriately execute a plurality of button effects set with different triggers according to the priority. In addition, since only the highest priority button effect (button effect with high effect effect) can be surely executed even while other button effects are being executed, the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

  In the button effect start process (S5801), first, the information of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is read (S5901). Next, based on the read information, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the button effect (S5902). In the process of S5902, a plurality of pieces of information stored in a plurality of storage areas (the first hierarchy area 223m1 to the fourth hierarchy area 223m4) are read out in descending order of priority. Therefore, when the execution timing of the button effect is the same, the button effect with high priority is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the button effective period start timing (see FIG. 24) defined in the button effect selection table 222b is reached, it is determined that it is the start timing of the button effect. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a range of two seconds (four seconds) before and after the button valid period start timing may be defined as the same timing and determined. By being configured in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the button effect is performed in a complicated manner when the start timings of the plurality of button effects are stored so as to be slightly different.

  In addition to the contents described above, even if a plurality of button effects stored at timings when the effective periods set for the button effects overlap are discriminated as button effects to be executed at the same timing. good.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S5902, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S5902: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the button effect (S5902: Yes), the button effect to be started this time is set to priority 1 by the information of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m read in the process of S5901. If it is determined that the priority is 1 (S5903: YES), it is determined whether another button effect is being executed (S5905).

  In the process of S5905, when it is determined that the other button effect is being executed (S5905: Yes), the button operation for the other button effects is invalidated in order to prioritize and execute the button effect of priority 1 Set (S5906), set the button effect flag corresponding to the button effect that has been disabled this time to OFF (S5907), next, set the display command showing the button effect corresponding to the information of the priority 1 of this time (S5908), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5905 that the other button effects are not being executed (S5905: No), the processes of S5906 to S5907 are skipped because it is not necessary to invalidate the other button effects. , S5908 processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5903 that the current button effect is not priority 1 (S5903: No), a display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the current priority is set (S5904), This process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. After executing the button effect start process (S5801), next, the button effect update process (S5802) is performed. Here, with reference to FIG. 74, the button effect update process (S5802) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing button effect update processing (S5802). In the button effect update process (S5802), the value of the button valid timer 223n is updated, and a process of setting a display command according to the operation on the frame button 22 performed during the button effect is executed.

  In the button effect update process (S5802), first, the value of the button valid timer 223n is read out (S6001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n read out in the process of S6001 is a value larger than 0 (S6002). If the value of the button valid timer 223n is not a value larger than 0 (S6002: No), this is a case where it is not the operation valid period for validly determining the operation on the frame button 22, so the operation valid period is set. The processing of S6002 to S6009, which is executed in the case of being performed, is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S6002: Yes), the value of the corresponding button valid timer 223n is decremented by 1 (S6003). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n subtracted in the process of S6003 is 0, that is, it is the end timing of the button effect (S6004). If it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is not 0 (that is, it is a value greater than 0) (S6004: No), since the button effect is being executed, the current value of the button valid timer 223n is selected. The corresponding display command is set (S6005). The display mode (remaining period display mode) of the valid period gauge 812a (see FIG. 9A) is generated by the display command set here.

  Then, when the process of S6005 ends, the process moves to the second frame button setting process (S6011) described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6004 that the value of the button valid timer 223n is 0 (S6004: Yes), it is the end timing of the button effect, so the button effect flag of the corresponding special symbol (first The button effect flag 223p and the second button effect flag 223q) are set to off (S6006), and it is then determined whether the operated flag 223s is set to on (S6007). That is, it is determined whether or not the player has operated (pressed) the frame button 22 such that the operation condition is satisfied during the operation valid period (during the button valid period).

  Specifically, when the operation condition of the button effect currently being executed is "perform one operation (depression) on the frame button 22", the frame button 22 is displayed once during the operation valid period. When the operation flag 223s is set to ON when the button is pressed, and the operation condition is "manipulate (press) the frame button 22 50 times", the frame button 22 is operated 50 times during the operation valid period ), The operated flag 223s is set to on. The condition for turning on the operation completion flag 223s is, for example, a predetermined lottery every time the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the condition established when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated reaches a predetermined number of times. It is also possible to set a condition that is satisfied when the lottery result is a specific result, or a condition that is satisfied when a period in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed satisfies a predetermined period.

  In the process of S6007, when it is determined that the operated flag 223s is on (S6007: Yes), a display command corresponding to the operated (display command indicating that the button operation in the button effect has succeeded) Is set (S6008), the operated flag 223s is set to OFF (S6009), the process of S6011 is executed, and the present process is ended. Based on the display command set in the process of S6008, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the success screen of the button effect (for example, see FIG. 9B), and the third symbol display device 81 Display on

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6007 that the operated flag 223s is not set to ON (S6007: No), the operation is not performed (concept including an operation to the extent that the operation condition is not established during the operation valid period). A corresponding display command is set (S6010), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process ends. Here, based on the display command set in the process of S6010, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the failure screen (see FIG. 10) of the button effect, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the second frame button setting process (S6011) which is one process in the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Do. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the second frame button setting process (S6011). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operation means operable by the player, and normally the first frame button 22a is the operation target The button effect is configured to be executed. Then, when a plurality of button effects are set in an overlapping manner, an overlapping button effect with the second frame button 22b as an operation target is performed. In the second frame button setting process (S6011), various processes to the second frame button 22b regarding the duplicate button effect are executed.

  In the second frame button setting process (S6011), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the button effect. (S6101). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the button effect (S6101: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102: Yes), the second frame button valid flag 223r is set to ON (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104. On the other hand, in the process of S6101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S6101: No), or when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the duplicate button effect in the process of S6102 (S6102: No), Since it is not the timing to set the second frame button to be effective, the process of S6103 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6104.

  In the process of S6104, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104). When it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the button effect (S6104: No), the present processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104: Yes), it is determined whether the end timing is the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105: Yes), the second frame button valid flag 223r is set to OFF (S6106), and a display command indicating the end of the button effect is set (S6107) ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6105 that it is not the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105: No), the process of S6106 is skipped because the second frame button need not be set invalid. The processing of S6107 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. After executing the button effect update process (S5802), next, the button pressing process is executed (S5803), and then the other process relating to the button is executed (S5804), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 76, a button pressing process (S5803) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / presentation process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this button pressing process (S5803).

  In the button pressing process (S5803), first, it is determined whether the second frame button valid flag 223r is on (S6201). When it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is off (S6201: No), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 22a is on, that is, whether or not the first frame button 22a is pressed ( S6202). If it is determined that the first frame button 22a is not pressed (S6202: No), this process is ended because neither the first frame button 22a nor the second frame button 22b is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is on (S6201), it is determined whether the second frame button is pressed (S6203). If it is determined that the second frame button 22b is not pressed (S6203: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first frame button 22a is pressed (S6202: Yes) or the second frame button 22b is pressed (S6203: Yes), the value of the corresponding pressing counter 223t is incremented by one. (S6204). Next, it is determined whether the value of the pressing counter 223t added in the process of S6205 is a predetermined value (S6205). If it is determined that the value of the button pressing counter 223t is a predetermined value (S6205: Yes), the operated flag 223s is set to ON (S6206), and a display command corresponding to the effect after operation is set (S6207) And the value of the pressing counter 223t is cleared to 0 (S6208), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pressing counter 223t is not a predetermined value, a display command corresponding to the counter value is set (S6209), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In addition, although the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to win the lottery result (jackpot having a large number of rounds) which is advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, it is limited to this. Without being hit, for example, it is possible to win a small hit where a small winning game may be executed, in which a bonus may be given to the player that is different from the big hit game only in the drawing of special figure 2 and the lottery result is not a big hit. A game state that is more advantageous for the player than if the player wins a jackpot in the special view 1 as a gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game may be configured (for example, a probability change state) Configured to make it easier to set And it may be.

  In this case, the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is easy to be executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and the second special symbol is selected when a specific first gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) is set. It is preferable that the first game state be set again so that the first game state is set again when the jackpot is easily performed and the jackpot is won by the second special symbol lottery during the first game state.

  In addition, as a gaming state, a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of an ordinary symbol) can be set as the gaming state, and in order to facilitate the drawing of the second special symbol during the latent state, Similarly, even when the normal state which is a low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, and in the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed In order to suppress that, you may comprise so that the fluctuation time of a long time (10 minutes) may be set.

  However, in the gaming machine configured in this manner, although the efficiency is low, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed during the normal state, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that gives the player an advantage is given.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is won by a predetermined lottery result (big hit or small hit) in the state where the normal state is set, forced stop is caused by the lottery of the second special symbol or It is good to be configured to temporarily stop. Thereby, in the state where the normal state is set, it can be set so that it is difficult for the second special symbol to be won by the jackpot.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this and the jackpot is won During the jackpot game to be executed based on what has been made, the ball passes through the specific area provided in the variable winning device 65, so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is over. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although three gaming states (normal state, time saving state, positive change state) can be set as gaming states, four settingable gaming states (normal state, latent state, It may be a definite change state, a short time state, or two or less.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the normal state, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, the first ball entrance 64b1 is provided in the left side area, and the first ball entrance with the electric work 640a attached in the right area and the second ball entrance 640 without the electric work 640a are provided. It is also possible to configure to play the right-handed game when the player is set to be the most advantageous game for the player.

  When configured in this manner, during the normal state, as in the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set so that the fluctuation time shorter than the special figure 2 fluctuation can be easily set, and during the latent state As in the first embodiment described above, the special figure 2 variation is set so that the variation time shorter than the special figure 1 variation is easier to be set, and in the positive change state and the short time state, the motorized part 640a is opened. It should be set to be easy.

  In this way, during the normal state, play a game aiming for a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol by left-handling game, and during time saving state, by the right-handed game, lottery of the first special symbol more efficiently than during normal state Play a game aiming for a big hit, and during a definite change state, with a right-handed game, with a higher probability than in a normal state, efficiently perform a lottery for the first special symbol to play a game aiming for a big hit, During the state, it is possible to play a game aiming for a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is enabled to execute various controls for the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S8001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S8101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S8102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S8103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 76). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S8001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 78, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S8102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S8101. And after repeating the process of S8102 several times including the process of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S8004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S8004, next, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S8005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 89A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S9502 in FIG. 89A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B), the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in a simplified manner. A command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79B) and a simplified display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 79B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640 When the start instruction of the change effect is issued from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change image is displayed immediately during the change effect period. Can be displayed on the screen to perform simple fluctuation effects. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 79 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 79 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern, not the power-on image. A command determination process (S8302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S8303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S8302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85.

  In the display setting process (S8303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S8304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S8303) or the simple display setting processing (S8309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S8304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S8305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S8306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S8308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S8309) is executed to shift to the process of S8304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S8302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 80, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S8401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S8402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S8403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: YES), variation pattern command processing is executed (S8405), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81 (a), details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S8405) will be described. FIG. 80 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing (S8405). The variation pattern command processing (S 8405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S8501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8503), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S8505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S8505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S8502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S8503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, for example, the player operates the operation means, or during the variable display of the special symbol, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed (rewritten) based on the effect mode set at another trigger. When the display rewriting command for outputting is output, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S8503, and the corresponding fluctuation is performed. Rewriting processing is performed to rewrite data subsequent to the display data. In addition, it is configured such that image data based on the effect mode after rewriting is generated from the time point when a predetermined time interval is left after the display rewriting command is received. As a result, after securing the time required for the rewriting process, it is possible to reliably execute the effect after the rewriting. Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, all (predetermined number) of effects that can be executed during the fluctuation, that is, the game, to the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. When the effect mode for causing the player to operate the operation means is executed, the effect to be performed when the player operates the operation means properly and the effect when the player does not operate the operation means properly It is necessary to be included in the fluctuation display data table corresponding to each effect information, including the effect to be performed, etc., and the information indicating the effect to be executed when the special figure holding ball number reaches the upper limit during the fluctuation The image data of various sprites is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and then output from the audio lamp control device 113. That on the basis of the instruction command, actually it may be configured to determine the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of variation of the special symbol causes the display corresponding to the effect that can be executed during the variation to be executed in different layers (layers). On the other hand, by setting and controlling the visible state in which the player can visually recognize and the invisible state in which the player can not visually recognize, only a specific effect may be displayed.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S8406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S8601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 79 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S8602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to ON (S8603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S8601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S8602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8406 that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If there is an opening command for use (S8408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S8409), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 8701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8408 that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8410). If the command for the number of rounds is found (S8410: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S8411), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S8801). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8410 that there is no display round number command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S8412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

  Here, the details of the ending command processing (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S8901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8901, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8412 that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and display is performed. If there is a fluctuation stop command for use (S8414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the variable stop command process (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 84 (a) is a flowchart showing the variable stop command process. This fluctuation stop command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 66) of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main control unit 110 The display stop command (output from the voice lamp control device 113) at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command) The normal display command and the various display commands set in the variable lamp processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the voice lamp control device 113 are shown.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel) and additionally When one special symbol is displayed as a stop (confirmed) with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit), the other special symbol in change is ended with a predetermined change pattern (change time) Regardless of the presence or absence of the symbol, it is configured to be stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the detachment forcibly.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when the variation of the special symbol is forcibly stopped from the main control device 110, by executing the variation stop process (see S4214 in FIG. 59). , A display command (forced display) for variably displaying the display pattern of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display to correspond to the display pattern of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed) (forced display) It is configured to set the stop command.

  In the present embodiment, even if the normal stop command described above has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display based on the forcible stop command received later is configured to be executed. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed prior to the normal stop command. Thereby, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main control device 110.

  In addition, the display fluctuating stop command includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display command indicating this temporary stop When (display temporary stop command) is received, a data table in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped is slightly rocked is set as the variable stop display data is determined.

  In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233 b and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (see S8931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8931, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8934). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8935), the variable stop command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8412 that there is no fluctuation stop command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the display notification If there is a command (S8416: Yes), display information command processing is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the notification command process (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. The notification command process is to execute a process corresponding to the (display) notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal conditions set in the main control device 110. This processing is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command.

  In the notification command process, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set to 233 d (S8951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8954). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8955), the notification command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it temporarily receives related commands such as a light emission command other than a display command, an audio output command, and a bonus feature drive command, and the processing of the display control device 114 The related command may be output to the corresponding control device in a state in which the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in the above is added.

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8416 that there is no display notification command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8418: Yes), the back image change command processing is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S9001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear surface image determination flag 233x provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is set on The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S9002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233 w set in the process of S 9001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233 x set in the process of S 9002. Identify.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed by the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S9002, RAM type that specifies the back image type to be displayed at that time, and further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image Specify the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8418 that there is no rear surface image change command (S8418: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8420), and there is an error command For example (S8420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S8421), and the processing returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S8421) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S9101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S9102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S9102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S9102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8416 that there is no error command (S8420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S8422), and the process returns to S8401. Note that, in the processing of S8422, command processing for various display commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. For example, when a display command for changing the timing at which a specific effect is executed is received, processing for changing the execution timing of the specific effect already defined in the variable display data table based on the clock data Is executed. In addition, it is a display for showing which of the fluctuation display of the third symbol concerning the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation display of the third symbol regarding the special drawing 2 fluctuation is the main fluctuation display and which is the follow fluctuation display When a command is received, the received command is determined, it is determined whether it is different from the setting status currently being executed (association), and when it is determined that it is different, the setting is made based on the fluctuation pattern command of each special figure fluctuation. A process of switching the displayed data table between the main variation display and the sub variation display is performed.

  In the process of S8401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes ), The processing of S8402 to S8422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S8401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S8308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command The variation pattern command process (see FIG. 81 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 81 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are extracted and the other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 81A) executed in this case, in the processing of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S8502, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S8303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S9201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and the process of S9202 to S9204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S9205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S9201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S9202), S9203 to S9204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S9203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S9203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S9204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S9301).

  In task processing (S8304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S9204), or when it is determined in the process of S9203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off (S9203: No), the process proceeds to S9205.

  In S9205, pointer update processing is executed (S9205). Here, details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S9401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S9401, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S9402). As a result, if it is the End information (S9402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S9403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S9405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S9403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S9406), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S9402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9206). In task processing (S8304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S9206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9207), and it is judged whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S9208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S9208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S9208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S9209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S9209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed and the finalized display is performed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S9210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9211). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S9214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S9215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In task processing (S8304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S9215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is on in the process of S9209 (S9209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S9216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S9216: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the finalized display effect Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S9221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S9216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S9216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S8309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 79B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of the above image in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S8305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S9501, that is, if it is off (S9501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S9502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 89 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S9502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S9601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S9601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S9602). In the process of S9602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S9602 (S9602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9602: Yes), the process proceeds to S9603. Further, as a result of the process of S9601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9601: No), the process proceeds to S9603.

  In the process of S9603, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S9603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9604), and this processing is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the resident video RAM 235 is not used. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S9603, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S9603: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9605), and this process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79B) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 79B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are performed, drawing of an image in normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) (see S9501: No in FIG. 89A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a normal image transfer setting process (S9503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S9503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9205) of the display setting process (S8303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S9702), and if it is transfer data information (S9702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S9703, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S9704), and the process proceeds to step S9705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S9702 (S9702: No), the processes of S9703 and S9704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9705. In the process of S9705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S9705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S9705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9706).

  In the process of S9706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S9706 (S 9706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S 9706: Yes), the process moves to the process of S9707. Further, as a result of the process of S9705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S9705: No), the process proceeds to S9707.

  In the process of S9707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9707). If the transfer start flag is on (S9707: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S9708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S9703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S9713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9707: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S9709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on and is off (S9709: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S9709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S9710) and provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233 x in the on state among the back image determination flag 233 x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S 9711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S9712), and the process proceeds to S9713.

  In the process of S9713, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9713). The determination in the process of S9713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9713 (S9713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S9713 (S9713: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S9714). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S9714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S9715), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S8306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information) The drawing list (FIG. 32) is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305) (S9801). That is, in the process of S9801, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S8304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S9802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S9802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S9803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 79B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel, but it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variable display is being executed, another variable display may be configured to be infeasible. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as composition which carries out change display in order from a holding ball with which a starting winning combination is temporally old. By configuring in this way, control can be simplified, and processing load can be reduced.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, priority is also given to a point in which the configuration of the storage area storing the priority of executed effects is changed and effects (for example, display effects) other than button effects. , A point for adding a holding effect to be executed when a new holding symbol is acquired, and a point for adding a function that allows the player to select a restriction on the effect to be performed. In order to cope with the difference described above, the electrical configuration and processing content of the audio lamp control device 113 are different.

  In the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be performed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variation of each special symbol It was possible to set the button effect as an effect. And in order to suppress that the button presentation set by another opportunity (Origin of setting the fluctuation production of the special figure 1 and an opportunity of setting the fluctuation production of the special figure 2) is performed overlappingly, A priority is given to the button effect for which the effect is to be executed, and the button effect is executed based on the given priority. As a result, even if the button effect is set at the overlapping timing, the button effect with high priority can be executed with priority, and an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the button effect can be set in response to the acquisition of the holding ball. Thereby, since the opportunity which can set a button effect increases, more button effects can be provided to a player.

  Also, in the first embodiment described above, during execution of the button effect (first button effect) set as the change effect of the special view 1, a specific button effect (second button effect) as the change effect of the special view 2 When is performed, the duplicate button effect (special button effect) in which the first button effect and the second button effect are fused is performed.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the execution timing of the button effect set as the variation effect of the special view and the execution timing of the button effect set based on the acquisition of the holding ball are overlapped. Also in the case, the duplicate button effect (special button effect) is performed. As a result, even while the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special drawing is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to acquire a new holding ball.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, priority is given to effects other than button effects (for example, advance effects performed during variation effects of the special drawing). As a result, since it is possible to manage the presence or absence of the execution of the button effect and the advance effect performed at the same execution timing, it is possible to provide the player with a more easily understood effect.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the number of storage areas for storing information on each effect given priority is increased, and the player can select the range of the storage area used to execute the effect. It is composed of By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the quality (priority) and the amount of the effect to be executed, so it is possible to provide an effect of an aspect desired by each player.

<Flow of Effects in Second Embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. 95, contents of characteristic effects performed in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a button effect (eight hold effect) is performed when the number of balls held for the special symbol reaches the upper limit number (eight), and FIG. 93 is a special view 1 During the execution of the button effect (button effect A) as a variation effect of, the flow is shown in which the duplicate button effect (super 8 withholding effect) is executed based on the number of balls reserved for the special symbol reaching a predetermined number. It is a timing chart. And FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 are the schematic diagrams which showed the content of an effect of the button effect (pending effect) performed based on having acquired the holding ball of a special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the winning information of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be stored up to four at a maximum, and the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be saved up to four at a maximum Configured. Then, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball entry unit 64 is disposed at the lower position of the game area, and the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 is the first ball entry port where winning information in Special Figure 1 can be acquired. It is configured to be alternately distributed to 64b1 and the left second entrance 64b2 where winning information in the special view 2 can be acquired.

  Therefore, in a normal state in which a game (left-handed game) to aim at the ball entry unit 64 is performed, the holding ball of the special symbol (the holding ball obtained by adding the holding ball of special figure 1 and the holding ball of special figure 2) A game in which eight can be won is played. And when the holding ball of the special symbol reaches eight, the holding symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the eight holding balls (see FIG. 94 (a) ) Is configured to be executed. In this way, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to acquire eight pieces of reserved storage of special symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the special figure special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed, and the special figure reservation number of balls (a value obtained by adding the special figure 1 number of holding balls and the special figure 2 number of holding balls The ball flows into the ball entry unit 64 with "6" (Special figure 1 holding ball number is "3", special figure 2 holding ball number is "3"), and the first ball entrance 64b1 When the ball enters, the special figure reservation sphere number becomes “7” (special figure 1 retention sphere number is “4”, special figure 2 suspension sphere number is “3”). Thereafter, when the ball flowing into the ball entering unit 64 enters the second left ball entrance 64b 2 until a new special figure fluctuation (lottery drawing) is executed, the special figure holding ball number is “8” (special figure 1 The number of balls held is “4”, and the number of balls held for special figure 2 is “4”.

  In the present embodiment, when the special figure holding ball number reaches the upper limit value (8), the prefetching result of each holding information (the special drawing lottery using the winning information for the acquired winning information The hold effect (see FIG. 94) for suggesting to the player the result of the predetermination to be carried out is executed, and the first frame button 22a is displayed to the player in the hold effect. A button effect (usually eight hold effect) for operating the button is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the effect of the normal eight-pending effect to be executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display content displayed when eight normal hold effects are executed, and FIG. 94 (b) is a typical game with eight normal hold effects. It is the model which showed an example of the display content displayed after operating the 1st frame button 22a.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when eight reserved effects are normally executed, reserved symbols h1 to h8 indicating the number of balls reserved for special symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 . Here, the reserved symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As in the first embodiment described above, the special figure holding ball number (a value obtained by adding the special figure 1 holding ball number and the special figure 2 holding ball number) is a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, the upper limit number “8 ") Is displayed in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a of the main display area Dm. Then, when the number of reserved special views reaches a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), it is displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds. The hold symbols h1 to h8 are displayed in the order of old hold storage, and although illustration is omitted, whether the hold symbol displayed is a hold symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 hold or a hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold It is displayed in a display mode that allows the player to identify whether it is a symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, it is possible to obtain the first ball entry port 64 b 1 from which the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can acquire the prize information of Special Figure 1 and the prize information of Special Figure 2 Because it is configured to be distributed alternately to the left second entrance 64b2, when the gaming state is a normal state, basically, a reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension, and a special pattern The holding symbol corresponding to FIG. 2 holding will be displayed alternately. However, the upper limit number for which the special figure 1 suspension and the special figure 2 suspension are both stored is set, and the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are different in fluctuation time It is configured to be able to be implemented.

  Therefore, for example, in the state of 3 special drawing 1 suspension and 3 special drawing 2 suspension, when the fluctuation time of a long time (for example, 90 seconds) is set as the special drawing 1 fluctuation, the long time fluctuation In some cases (for example, three times) special figure 2 fluctuation is executed until the end of. In such a situation, the number of Toku-shuku-to-hold stored on hold will differ greatly between Toku-zu 1 and To-ji 2 and according to the example described above Figure 2 pending "0" situations occur. And, in this situation, when the ball is kept flowing into the ball entering unit 64 and the special figure holding ball number is increased, when the special figure 1 holding reaches the upper limit number (4), the special figure 2 holding value is “ A situation occurs that is 2 ". In this case, if the ball enters the ball entering unit 64 continuously, even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the number of balls in Special Figure 1 has reached the upper limit, It is not possible to acquire a new Tokusetsu 1 holding ball, and to get Tokusou 2 holding ball continuously. As a result, in the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a held symbol indicating that the special figure 2 is held is displayed continuously.

  As described above, a pachinko machine having a configuration in which it is possible to alternately acquire the special figure 1 reserve (winning information corresponding to the special figure 1) and the special figure 2 pending (winning information corresponding to the special figure 2). In 10, according to the number of holding balls acquired and the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation to be executed, the holding symbols displayed in the order of being stored are alternately displayed special drawing 1 holding and special drawing 2 holding Even if the player is not in the state, by looking at the display mode of the securing symbol, it is possible to easily make the player understand the type of the special symbol corresponding to the holding symbol, and to provide an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the special figure reservation ball number reaches a predetermined number, although it is comprised so that presentation (hold effect) using the reservation symbol which shows the special figure reservation ball number will be performed, a reservation effect is carried out. Another condition may be provided as an execution condition of, for example, it is configured to execute the holding effect when a predetermined number (for example, two pieces) of holding symbols indicating special image holding of the same type are displayed side by side It may be good, and it may constitute so that a reservation production may be performed based on combination of arrangement order of special figure classification which each reservation symbol shows, and a display number (special figure reservation memory number) of reservation symbol.

  By configuring in this way, when one of the special drawing 1 holding ball number and the special drawing 2 holding ball number reaches the upper limit number, the firing of the ball is stopped and the operation of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 94 (a), the description will be continued. The reserved symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds are transferred to the in-execution display area Ds1a formed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds each time the special figure change is started. The special figure is displayed while the player is able to grasp the display mode of the holding symbol corresponding to the special figure fluctuation currently being executed (the special display variation changed by the holding effect until the special figure fluctuation is executed). A change is performed. By configuring in this manner, the presentation result of the holding presentation and the presentation result of the fluctuation presentation executed corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation are analyzed in a combined manner, and the lottery drawing of the special drawing lottery is predicted to the player It can be made easy.

  Normally, when eight holding effects are executed, the display mode of the holding symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds is a preparation display prompting the player to operate the first frame button 22a. It is variably displayed to the mode (display mode imitating the first frame button 22a). Then, a comment prompting the player to operate the first frame button 22a eight times is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the first frame button 22a which is an operation target in the normal eight hold effect is displayed. A simulated button 812 is displayed. By displaying in this manner, it is possible to easily inform the player of the game content to be executed during the normal eight hold effect.

  Then, when the player presses the first frame button 22a during the normal eight hold effect, the display mode of the hold symbol h1 is first variably displayed from the preparation display mode to the suggestion display mode (see FIG. 94 (b)). Then, the display mode is variably displayed in the order of the retention symbols h2 to h8. Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (b), the contents of the effect result of the normal eight-pending effect will be described.

  In the normal eight hold effect, when the player operates the first frame button 22a, a suggestion display mode capable of suggesting the player the result of pre-reading of each winning information corresponding to the respective hold symbols h1 to h8 is displayed . This suggestion display mode implies that the information indicating the big hit is included in the target winning information, and a plurality of displays with different easiness of selection when the information indicating the big hit is included. The aspect (color) is configured to be displayable.

  Specifically, the display modes of “white → blue → green → red” are defined in the order of being difficult to select (when the jackpot expectation is low) when the information indicating the jackpot is included. That is, the holding symbol displayed in the display mode of "white" as a result of the normal eight holding effect is hard to win a big hit in the special figure lottery corresponding to the holding symbol, and is displayed in the display mode of "red" The reserved symbol that has been made is configured so that it is easy to win a jackpot in the special drawing lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol.

  In this way, a special holding symbol (for example, "red" is displayed before the special drawing lottery is executed by grasping the effect result of the normal eight holding effects until the special drawing fluctuation is actually executed. The game can be played with a feeling of expectation for the jackpot with respect to the holding symbol displayed in. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the jackpot for a longer time, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the normal eight hold production of this embodiment, as described above, it is configured to execute the effect of operating the operation means (the first frame button 22a) the number of times corresponding to the number of held symbols h1 to h8. However, the number of times the first frame button 22a is operated is not limited to this, and may be set to a number smaller than the number of holding symbols, or may be set to a large number. Here, when the number of times of operation less than the number of the held symbols being displayed is set, a suggestion display mode that suggests the result of prefetching of the prize information stored in the hold, the indication of high jackpot expectation is high In the order in which the modes are set, the reserved symbols h1 to h8 may be variably displayed by the number corresponding to the number of times of operation, or the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are operated in the order in which the suggestion display mode having low jackpot expectation is set. The variable display may be performed by the number corresponding to the number of times.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to comprise so that the suggestion display mode of one holding symbol may be variably displayed in multiple times, when operation frequency | count of the frequency | count of the number of times larger than the number of the holding symbols currently displayed is set. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), normally, eight reserved symbols h1 to h8 are displayed in the same display manner as a preparation display manner of the reserved effect, and the player By making it difficult to predict the content of the suggestion display mode until the user presses the first frame button 22a, it is configured to execute an effect that causes the player to press the first frame button 22a positively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration capable of causing the player to predict the display mode of the suggestion display mode may be used by the display mode of the preparation display mode, and the display color of the preparation display mode is plural. It may be configured to be settable so that the display color of the preparation display mode being displayed may indicate the display mode of the suggestion display mode. For example, when the display color of the preparation display mode is "green", it is preferable that the suggestion display mode of "green" or "red" be displayed when the first frame button 22a is pressed. With this configuration, the player can press the first frame button 22a in a state of giving the player a sense of anticipation for a big hit, which can enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of each reserved symbol h1 to h8 is configured to be variably displayed based on the pre-reading result of the corresponding winning information, but the present invention is not limited to this and is reserved and stored. The display mode of the entire reserved symbols h1 to h8 may be variably displayed based on the pre-read results of all winning information. In this case, for example, among the reserved symbols h1 to h8, using the display pattern of the reserved symbols h1 to h4, the jackpot type (game state set after the jackpot game is over or the number of rounds for the jackpot game) when winning the jackpot It is good to constitute so that the display mode of each reservation symbol h1 to h8 may be set so as to suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit by using the display embodiments of the remaining reservation symbols h5 to h8.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display one suggestion target content by combining the display modes of a plurality of reserved symbols, and therefore, it is possible to provide the player with more detailed suggestion information. Further, by variably displaying the display modes of all the holding symbols, the player is notified of the effect result of the holding effect, so that it is possible to operate the first frame button 22a actively until the end.

  In addition, in this embodiment, an example using only one operation means (the first frame button 22a) as an operation means for causing the player to operate in the normal eight hold effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As a preparation display mode corresponding to the holding symbol in which the big hit expectation degree suggestion indication mode (red color) is displayed, the preparation display mode showing operating the operation means (second frame button 22b) different from normal is displayed When the display mode of the reserved symbol is variably displayed, the second frame button 22b may be operated. In this way, in one effect (usually eight hold effects), it is possible to operate a plurality of types of operation means, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. Further, since the jackpot expectation can be varied according to the type of the operation means, it is possible to make the player interested in which operation means is to be performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of operation means, the player is set so that it is difficult to identify (cannot be identified) the operation means capable of accepting an operation for variably displaying the display pattern of the holding symbols h1 to h8. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not the display mode of the holding symbols h1 to h8 is to be variably displayed according to the operation means by which the player has operated. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the operation means for performing the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 93, the button effect performed based on the special figure variation and the button effect (8 pending effect effects) performed based on the special figure holding ball number are performed in an overlapping manner The flow of the game contents in the case will be described. FIG. 93 shows the flow of the effect when the button effect performed based on the special figure fluctuation and the button effect (eight reserved effect performed) performed based on the special figure holding ball number are performed in an overlapping manner It is a timing chart shown. In addition, about the content of the button effect performed based on a special figure fluctuation | variation, since it is the same as the 1st control example mentioned above, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 92, when the number of special drawing reserved balls reaches eight, a button effect (usually eight holding effects) using the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is performed It is composed of In addition to this, while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are used under the loose condition (the number of special figure reserved balls reaches 7) than the normal eight pending effect The button effect is configured to be executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing a game even while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 93, while the button effect (button effect A (the operation target is the first frame button 22a)) is being executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure holding ball number (special figure 1 holding) When the sum of the number of pending storages and the number of pending storages for special view 2) reaches 7 (see (a) in FIG. 93), super pending presentation is executed instead of button effect A (see FIG. 95 (a)). Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the contents of the effect of the super holding effect will be described. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the super holding effect is executed. FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the result of the effect of super holding effect.

  This super holding effect is a holding effect executed by inheriting the effect mode of the button effect A (see FIG. 9A) being executed, and as shown in FIG. 95A, in the main display area dm Similar to the button effect A, the sleeping character 811 is displayed, and an effect of causing the operating means (the second frame button 22b) to be hit continuously in order to cause the character 811 is executed. Then, every time the second frame button 22 b is pressed, the suggestion 811 a to 811 d appear from the character 811. The suggestion modes 811a to 811d are set based on the prefetching result of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds, similarly to the above-described normal eight reserved effects. This is a suggestion mode that suggests a suggestion display mode of each reserved symbol h1 to h7.

  Then, when the second frame button 22b is continuously hit and the character 811 is raised, various modes shown in the suggestion modes 811a to 811d shift to the holding symbols h1 to h7 as shown in FIG. It is displayed as a suggestion display mode which shows the jackpot expectation degree of retention design h1-h7. As described above, in the super holding effect, since the suggestion modes 811a to 811d are displayed with respect to the normal eight holding effects described above, it is not possible to know which holding symbol corresponds to which suggestion mode. Thus, the player can be notified in advance of the display mode (color) that can be displayed as the suggestion display mode of the hold symbols h1 to h7.

  Therefore, when the information (for example, red) which shows that big hit expectation is high as a suggestion mode is displayed, while expecting that the suggestion display mode of reservation symbols h1 to h7 is displayed in red, The 2 frame button 22b can be operated. In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that all the aspects displayed as the suggestion aspect 811a-811d may not transfer to the suggestion display aspect of the retention design h1-h7. Thereby, for example, even if a display mode with a high jackpot expectation is not selected as a suggestion display mode of the suspension symbol set based on the prefetch result of the winning combination corresponding to the suspension symbol h1 to h7, Since the display mode (red) having a high jackpot expectation degree in a pseudo manner can be displayed as the suggestion mode 811, the stage effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated as the button effect A, and the super, in order to make the player grasp that the super holding effect has been executed by switching to the button effect A. Although the operation means (second frame button 22b) that is the operation target of the hold effect is configured to be different, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same operation means may be the operation target for any button effect. You may configure it.

  As described above, in the case where one button effect is being executed, another button effect (a button effect that is preferentially executed (higher priority) than a button effect being executed) is executed. By configuring to execute overlapping (fusion) effect (super hold effect) in which the effect content of the button effect being executed is taken over, the effect content of the button effect is suddenly switched and the effect is difficult for the player to understand Can be suppressed.

  In addition, even when the button effect with a higher priority than the button effect being executed is established by a different trigger (a trigger that is not established at the start timing of the button effect being executed), the button with high priority The effect can be enhanced because the effect can be reliably executed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the second embodiment, with respect to the above-described first embodiment, when setting the presence / absence of execution of the holding effect using the holding symbol and the effect mode of the holding effect The difference is that a holding effect selection table 223aa to be referred to and a simultaneous effect permission setting area 223ab to be referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute each effect given the same priority at the same time are added. ing. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  Although detailed description will be omitted, in the second embodiment, priority is given to various notice effect contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 223a. Thereby, in the above-described first embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effect to be executed is determined based on the priority given to each button effect. In the second embodiment, in addition to the button effect, various notice effects set based on the special figure fluctuation (for example, the jackpot expectation degree of the special figure fluctuation under execution such as the comment effect and the mini character effect) in the special figure fluctuation period The priority is given also to the effect executed to be completed in a specific period (for example, 2 to 5 seconds).

  By configuring in this manner, the button effect and the advance effect are executed redundantly, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand (for example, a time when an effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is displayed as a result of the button effect) At the same timing, a presentation with a high hit probability is displayed as the result of the preview production at the same timing, or the same character as the character appearing in the button production appears in the preview production, which character appeared It is possible to further suppress the execution of an effect or the like that makes it difficult to understand whether the effect is performed.

  The hold effect selection table 223aa is a data table that is referred to when setting the presence or absence of hold effect using the hold symbol and the effect mode of the hold effect, and the number of holding balls output from the main control unit 110 It is referred to in the special holding effect process (see S4523 in FIG. 104) of the holding ball number process (S4208 in FIG. 103) executed when the command is received (S6309 in FIG. 104). Here, the contents of the hold effect selection table 223aa will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hold effect selection table 223aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 97, the holding effect selection table 223aa is included in the current holding ball number (value obtained by adding the special drawing 1 holding ball number and the special drawing 2 holding ball number) and the prize information to be the object of effect Based on the propriety determination information and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v, the effect pattern to be executed (the effect mode of the on-hold effect) and the priority are defined.

  Specifically, it is a case where the number of holding balls (a value obtained by adding the number of special drawing 1 holding balls and the number of special drawing 2 holding balls) is “1 to 3”, and the judgment information indicates “hit”, In the range of “0 to 39”, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v defines “does not execute the hold effect (displayed as“ − ”in FIG. 97)”, and in the range of “40 to 99” The effect pattern "pending A" and the priority "2" are defined. On the other hand, in the case where the success / failure determination information indicates "displacement" and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 94", "on hold effect is not executed ("-"in FIG. 97). "Display" is defined, and in the range of "94 to 99", the effect pattern "pending A" and the priority "3" are defined.

  Next, it is a case where the number of holding balls (a value obtained by adding the number of special figure 1 holding balls and the number of special drawing 2 holding balls) is "4 to 5" and the hit / not decision information indicates "hit" In the range of "0 to 59", the value of the second effect counter 223v defines "does not execute the hold effect (displayed as"-"in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "60 to 84", the effect is The pattern “pending B” and the priority “2” are defined, and the effect pattern “button pending A” and the priority “1” are defined in the range of “85 to 99”. On the other hand, in the case where the success / failure determination information indicates "displacement" and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 89", "on hold effect is not executed ("-"in FIG. 97). "Display" is specified, effect pattern "pending B", priority "2" are defined in the range of "90-94", effect pattern "button pending A" in the range of "95-99" , Priority "3" is defined.

  Finally, it is the case where the number of holding balls (the sum of special drawing 1 holding ball number and special drawing 2 holding ball number) is "6, 7" and the pass / fail judgment information indicates "hit", and it is acquired In the range of "0 to 29", the value of the second effect counter 223v defines "does not execute the hold effect (displayed as"-"in FIG. 97)", and in the range of "30 to 69", the effect is The pattern "pending C" and the priority "1" are defined, and the effect pattern "button pending A" and the priority "3" are defined in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, in the case where the success / failure determination information indicates "displacement" and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 79", "on hold effect is not performed ("-"in FIG. "Display" is specified, the effect pattern "pending C", the priority "2" are defined in the range of "80 to 97", the effect pattern "button pending A" in the range of "98 to 99" , Priority "1" is defined.

  The simultaneous rendering availability setting area 223ab is a storage area that is referred to when it is determined whether or not the effects given the same priority are to be performed simultaneously, and the special operation (when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on When the effect switching operation is performed, information indicating whether or not simultaneous effect execution is performed is stored. Here, when information indicating that simultaneous rendering is not performed is stored, it is stored in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab1 (see FIG. 99 (a)) of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa described later. It is controlled such that an effect referring only to the existing effect information is executed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (b). FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-described first embodiment is replaced with the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m and effects hierarchy storage area group 223aa. The difference is that the effect level storage area 223ae is provided, and the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223f is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  The effect hierarchy storage area group 223 aa is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect information set in various processes of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the assigned priority. Here, the contents of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 98 and FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 98 (b) is each memory defined in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is the model which showed the area typically. Further, FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (d) are schematic diagrams for explaining the flow of storing the set effect information.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is composed of a first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, a second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and a second effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. . Each of the storage areas (223ab to 223ad) has a storage area (area) capable of storing effect information of different priorities (priority 1 to priority 4) (see FIG. 98 (b)). .

  That is, in the first embodiment described above, the button effect hierarchy storage area 223m is provided as a storage area for storing effect information for indicating effects set in each process of the audio lamp control device 113, and the priority is set. In contrast to the fact that one effect information of “1”, two effect information of priority “2”, and one effect information of priority “3” can be stored, this second The embodiment is different in that three or more pieces of effect information having a priority of “1” to “4” can be stored at the maximum.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the flow of storage processing of effect information in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 (a) shows the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99 (b) shows the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. c) shows the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ad of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99 (d) shows the concept of each process for setting an effect to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has a total of 12 areas for storing the set effect information (see FIGS. 99 (a) to (c)). , And at least four processes for setting presentation information by giving priority (FIG. 99 (d)). Then, the effects (effects with priority) set in the respective processes shown in FIG. 99 (d) are stored (stored) in the respective storage areas according to the set order and the given priorities. Ru.

  The set effect information is stored (stored) in the memory area indicating the corresponding priority in the order of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. That is, for example, when the effect of priority "2" is set, first, it is determined whether or not the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, and is not stored. In this case, the rendering information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first rendering hierarchy storage area 223ab. On the other hand, when the rendering information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first rendering hierarchy storage area 223ab, next, whether the rendering information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ac2 of the second rendering hierarchy storage area 223ac After that, the same processing is executed also for the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad.

  Then, when the rendering information is already stored in the storage area of the corresponding priority of the third rendering hierarchy storage area 223ad (when the rendering information is set beyond the number of storable numbers), the rendering set this time Configured to discard information. The present invention is not limited to this, and the oldest effect information may be determined, and the effect information to be discarded may be determined based on the determination result, or the effect may be generated in the storage area of lower priority than the set priority. Information may be stored. In this case, for example, the priority of the set effect information may be changed to the priority corresponding to the stored storage area, or the original priority of the effect information stored in the storage area of different priorities May be temporarily stored, and the effect information may be stored in a predetermined storage area when an empty storage area corresponding to the original priority occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (d), in the second embodiment, a special effect 1 variable button effect capable of setting a button effect based on a lottery result of the special image 1 lottery as an effect capable of giving priority , Special figure 2 variation button effect, special figure variation display effect, and hold change effect (various effects selected by hold effect selection table 222aa), which is set in each process The storage area that can store the effect information is made different. Specifically, the effect information indicating the button effect set as the special figure 1 change button effect is the area that can be stored in the priority 1 area to the priority 3 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab 1 and the special figure 2 The effect information indicating the button effect set as the variable button effect is an area capable of storing the priority 1 area to the priority 4 area from the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab and the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac.

  In addition, effect information indicating various advance notice effects set as special view variation display effects can store priority 2 areas to priority 4 areas of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad The effect information indicating the on hold effect (display effect, button effect) set as the area for the on-hold change effect is the priority 2 area to priority 4 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad. The area is an area that can be stored.

  In this way, according to the setting trigger of the various effects to which the priority is given, the predetermined regularity is given by varying the range of the storage area (storage area) in which the effect information indicating the effect is stored. Can be performed.

  The simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223 ae is a flag for indicating that the rendering with the same priority is not performed in duplicate, and is not in a state where the rendering with the same priority is not performed in duplicate. If it is set to on. The simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223 ae allows the player to change the setting condition arbitrarily, and the effect level selection process (see S 6221 in FIG. 109) executed in the button pressing process 2 (see S 5853 in FIG. 108). Is set variably based on the operation content of the player's operation means (S6605 and S6606 in FIG. 109).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether the rendering with the same priority is executed in duplicate. Therefore, a player who wants to experience various effects sets the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae off, and a player who wants to experience a simple effect sets the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae on. Since the desired effect is executed only by doing, it is possible to easily provide a game suitable for the player.

  In this embodiment, although the execution mode of the effect can be selected from two types by using the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae, any configuration may be adopted as long as the player can select an arbitrary execution mode, for example, Of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, an effect level (effect level 1) at which an effect using only the effect information stored in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab is executed, and a first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab The effect level (effect level 2) at which the effect using only the effect information stored in the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac is executed, and the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad Effect level (effect level 4) at which the effect using the effect information being executed is executed, and the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to third effect hierarchy storage Effect level (effect level 5) at which effect using effect information stored in priority 1 area and priority 2 area in rear 223ad is executed, and first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to third effect hierarchy Of the storage area 223ad, any of a plurality of effect levels such as an effect level (effect level 6) at which effects using effect information stored in the priority 3 area and the priority 4 area are executed The effect level may be configured to be selectable by the player.

  When configured in this way, for example, when effect level 6 is selected, it is possible to easily execute effects that are difficult to be executed by effects with high priority if normal, so it is possible to play an effect different from normal It can be easily provided to a person and the effect of presentation can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the storage areas of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa are divided into a plurality of storage areas (first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad) and priorities 1 to 4 to form Because of this, the effect based on the above-described effect level can be easily performed only by limiting the range of the storage area read out when performing the effect.

  In the present embodiment, the same processing (processing for setting the presentation mode) is performed when setting the presentation regardless of the content of restriction on the presentation to be executed, and after the presentation mode is set. Even when the range (rendering level) of the effect to be executed by the player is variably set, the rendition corresponding to the effect range (rendering level) after the variable setting can be performed, but the invention is limited thereto. Alternatively, when setting the effect mode of various effects, the range (rendering level) of the effect to be executed may be determined, and the presence or absence of the setting of the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result. Thereby, the process for setting a presentation mode can be reduced.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the special effect mode is set as an effect with high priority (for example, effect of priority 1), the priority associated with the special effect mode is low. When the effect (for example, the special related effect of priority 4) is set in the storage area, the special related effect is executed with priority over the effects stored in the other priority 1 to 3 areas It is configured to be able to.

  In this manner, by linking low-frequency effects (low-priority effects) to high-priority effects and configuring them as executable, it is possible to provide the player with effects that are difficult to perform alone. , Can enhance the rendering effect. In addition, when special related rendition is executed, the special rendition is executed after correcting the execution timing of the special related rendition of low priority before the execution timing of the special rendition of high priority. In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation. In this case, by defining a condition to be established when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery as a setting (execution) condition of a special effect, an effect with low priority is executed for the player. Can enhance the stage effects.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 109, the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the control executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. Description will be made focusing on the differences with the processing. In the second embodiment, the initial value setting process (see S4010 in FIG. 57) of the RAM executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 57) of the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the first embodiment described above In place of the button effect initial setting process (see S4012 in FIG. 100) to be executed and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (S4252 in FIG. 101) Refer to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61), and change the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 2 (see S4254 in FIG. 102) to the holding ball number process (see S4208 in FIG. 63). In place of the ball holding number process 2 (see S4258 in FIG. 63) with the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67), the variable display setting process 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 105) is pressed. Instead of the process (see S5803 of FIG. 76), the button depression process 2 (see S5853 in FIG. 108), it is different in that run. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the button effect initial setting process (S4012) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect initial setting process (S4012). In the second embodiment, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with operation means (effect setting switch) at a position where the hall clerk can operate and the player can not operate (for example, the back of the pachinko machine 10). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while operating the effect setting switch in the on state, setting information indicating simultaneous effect prohibition is stored in the simultaneous effect permission setting area 222aa. Then, in the button effect initial setting process (S4012), when the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the simultaneous effect is executed based on the setting information stored in the simultaneous effect permission setting area 222aa. A process of setting the presence or absence of is performed.

  Specifically, when the button effect initial setting process (S4012) is executed, the setting information of the simultaneous effect permission setting area 222aa is read (S4031), and in the case where the read setting information is the setting information indicating the simultaneous effect prohibition The simultaneous rendering prohibition flag is set to ON, and when it is not the setting information to prohibit the simultaneous rendering, the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag is set to OFF (S4032). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to arbitrarily set an initial setting situation regarding simultaneous rendering in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the hall staff is configured to be able to operate the effect setting switch provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, but the invention is not limited thereto, and after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, A hall staff is also arranged in the inoperable position (for example, the inside of the base case sealed), and it is set without changing the presence or absence of simultaneous rendering execution for each type of pachinko machine 10 You may configure. In this case, for example, the pachinko machine 10 in which the same effect mode can be executed, and in the pachinko machine 10 (so-called pachinko machine 10 with different specs) different in jackpot probability of special symbol and jackpot type In pachinko machine 10 (for example, pachinko machine 10 in which the jackpot probability is set low) which you want to execute, the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the jackpot probability is high) which sets simultaneous production to executable and you do not want to execute many effects In the pachinko machine 10) which has been set, it is preferable to set the simultaneous rendering to be not executable.

  By configuring in this manner, the amount of effect to be executed according to the length of the big hit interval of the special symbol on the design value can be easily performed without changing the content of the process of setting various effects of the audio lamp control device 113 Can be adjusted. Further, by operating the effect setting switch, not only the presence or absence of the simultaneous effect execution, but also within the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, it is possible to set the range to be read when executing various effects. good. Even with this configuration, it is possible to easily adjust the amount of effect to be executed according to the length of the jackpot interval of the special symbol on the design value.

  As described above, when the effect setting switch is provided at a position at which the player can not operate, and the effect amount to be executed by the pachinko machine 10 is limited, an operation for selecting the effect amount by the player described later (Refer to FIG. 109) may be configured to be executed in a limited effect amount.

  Next, the contents of the special view 1 fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 4252) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 1 fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 4252). This special view 1 change start process 2 (FIG. 4252) is different from the above-mentioned special view 1 change start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) with various effect modes (notices selected with reference to the change pattern selection table 222a). It is different in that the process for storing in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223 aa the effect mode to which the priority is given among the effects etc. is executed, and the other is the same. About the same content, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (Figure 4252) is executed, first, the processing of S4301 to S4302 identical to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) described above is executed, and then fluctuation is performed. With reference to the pattern selection table 223a, a detailed rendering mode (such as advance notice rendering) is selected (S4321). Here, in the process of S4321, the information indicating the result of the determination of yes or no included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the type of stop, and the acquired effect counter (periodically updated value On the basis of the value of the random number value), various presentation modes (display contents of advance presentation effects, presence or absence of button effects), execution timing, and priority are set.

  When the process of S4321 is finished, the presentation mode (such as advance announcement presentation) to which the priority is added is extracted from the presentation modes selected this time (S4322), and the information (stage information) indicating the extracted presentation mode is supported. The priority level 2 area to the priority level 4 area of the effect layer storage area (the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad) to be set are set (stored) (S4323). Here, since the effect information indicating the effect mode extracted in the process of S4322 is the special effect variation display effect (see FIG. 99 (d)), the effect information is, as shown in FIG. 99, the storage range Are the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When the process of S4323 is finished, the processes of S4304 to S4306 that are the same as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above (see S4202 of FIG. 60) are executed, and this process is ended.

  Next, the contents of the special view 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S 4254) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 2 fluctuation start process 2 (S 4254). This special view 2 change start process 2 (S 4254) is selected from various change modes (referring to the change pattern selection table 222 a with respect to the special view 2 change start process described above (see S 4204 in FIG. 61) And the like) is different in that a process for storing in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa the effect mode to which the priority is given is performed, and the other process is the same. About the same content, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254) is executed, first, the processing of S4351-S4352 which is the same as the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 in Figure 61) mentioned above is executed, then the fluctuation pattern With reference to the selection table 223a, a detailed rendering mode (preliminary effects etc.) is selected (S4371). Here, in the process of S4371, the information indicating the result of the determination of yes or no included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the type of stop, and the acquired effect counter (the value is periodically updated On the basis of the value of the random number value), various presentation modes (display contents of advance presentation effects, presence or absence of button effects), execution timing, and priority are set.

  After the process of S4371, among the selected presentation modes, the presentation mode (such as the notice presentation etc.) to which the priority is given is extracted (S4372), and the information (stage information) indicating the extracted presentation mode is supported. The priority level 2 area to the priority level 4 area of the effect layer storage area (the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad) to be set are set (stored) (S4373). Here, since the effect information indicating the effect mode extracted in the process of S4372 is the special effect variation display effect (refer to FIG. 99 (d)), the effect information is, as shown in FIG. 99, the storage range Are the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad. When the process of S4373 is finished, the processes of S4354 to S4356 that are the same as the special view 2 fluctuation start process described above (see S4204 of FIG. 61) are executed, and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the contents of the number-of-held-balls processing 2 (S4258) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number-of-held-balls processing 2 (S4258). This holding ball number process 2 (S4258) is a process of storing the selected holding effect in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa in the holding ball number process (see S4208 in FIG. 63) described above, and the number of holding balls is It differs in the point which performs with the processing which chooses a holding production, when not reaching the upper limit. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  When the holding ball number process 2 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4501 to S4504 as the above-described holding ball number process (see S4208 in FIG. 63) are performed. Here, in the process of S4503, when it is determined that the number of holding balls (number of special drawing holding balls) is not the upper limit (8) (S4503: No), the special holding effect process is executed (S4523). It shifts to processing, and ends this processing. The details of the special holding effect process executed in S4523 will be described later with reference to FIG. 104, but it is determined whether the super holding effect (see FIG. 95) is to be performed, and the number of holding balls has not reached the upper limit A selection process of holding effect in the case is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the on-hold effect is to be executed in the process of S4504 (S4504: Yes), next, the on-off effect pattern (offer mode) is set using the on-off effect selection table 223aa (S4521). The information (rendering information) indicating the effect mode of the holding effect is set (stored) in the corresponding memory area of the effect hierarchy memory area group 222aa (S4522), and the process proceeds to S4507, and the present process is ended.

  Here, the information (render information) indicating the player mode set in the process of S4521 becomes the hold change effect (refer to FIG. 99 (d)), so as shown in FIG. 99 (d), the driver information The storage range of the first to third priority hierarchy storage areas 223ab to 223ad is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area.

  Next, the contents of the special hold effect process (S4523) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special hold effect process (S4523). The special holding effect process (S4523) is a process executed when it is determined that the number of holding balls is not the upper limit (8) in the holding ball number process 2 (S4258 in FIG. 103), It is a process in which setting of holding effect is performed. That is, this is a process for setting a holding effect in the case where the special figure holding ball number is not the upper limit value.

  When the special hold effect process (FIG. 4523) is executed, it is first determined whether the special view 1 button effect is being executed (S6301), and if it is determined that it is being executed (S6301: Yes), then It is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect being executed is the button effect stored in the priority 1 area (S6302). Here, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed has priority 1 (S6302: Yes), since a new hold effect can not be executed during that period, the process ends. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6302 that the special figure 1 button effect being executed is not the priority 1 (S6302: No), then the current number of balls reserved (the suspension updated in S4502 of FIG. 103) If it is determined that the value of the ball number counter is "7" (S6303), it is determined that it is "7" (S6303: Yes), the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab If it is determined that the effect information has already been stored (S6304), and if it is determined that the effect information is not stored (S6304: No), information (effect information) indicating a special hold effect (super hold effect), The process is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, and the present process ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S6304 that the rendering information is already stored in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first rendering hierarchy storage area 223ab (S6304: Yes), rendering information to be executed with priority is set. In the present state, the present processing is ended without executing the current holding effect (super holding effect). If it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect is not being executed in the process of S6301 (S6301: Yes), or if it is determined that the number of holding balls is not 7 in the process of S6303 (S6303: No), Then, the process shifts to the process of S6306, and based on the hold effect selection table 223aa, the presence / absence of execution of the hold effect and the effect mode (effect pattern) of the hold effect are selected (decided).

  Then, as a result of the process of S6306, when the hold effect is selected (S6307), information (render information) indicating the determined hold effect is set in the corresponding memory rear in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa (S6308) ), End this processing. Here, as the information (rendering information) indicating the holding effect set (decided) in the process of S6306 becomes the holding change effect (see FIG. 99 (d)), as shown in FIG. 99 (d), The storage range of the effect information is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, various effects are set for each opportunity regardless of the presence or content of various effects set for other occasions, and selection is made in each process ( Various settings set) are configured to be set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and among the plurality of effect information stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, only effects satisfying the execution condition are selected. Configured to run. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced because it is not necessary to execute the determination process (process for determining the effect setting situation in another trigger) when setting various effects.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162). In this variation display setting process 2 (S4162), for the variation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67), an effect for setting a special effect 1 variation or an effect mode of variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation. The difference is that the mode setting process (S5321 (S5322)) is executed, and the other processes are the same. About the same processing content, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  Here, contents of the effect mode setting process (S5321) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect mode setting process (S5321). In the effect mode setting process (S5321), the special display 1 fluctuation start flag is determined to be set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 105) (S5301: Yes). It is executed to set up the production mode of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation in Figure 1 and it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S5306: Yes), it corresponds to the special figure 2 fluctuation Processing to be performed to set the effect mode of the changing effect, and among the various effect information stored in the effect layer storage area group 223aa, at the change start timing of each special view, the effect satisfying the execution condition It is a process for setting an effect mode based on information (effect information with high priority).

  When the effect mode setting process (S5321) is executed, first, the effect information stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is read (S6401), and the related effect setting process is executed (S6402). Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the related effect setting process (S6402) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the related effect setting process (S6402). In this related effect setting process (S6402), the low priority (priority 1 to 4) effect information to be executed in association with (linking) the effect information set to the high priority (priority 1) is determined A process for performing the process and a process for determining non-priority effect information to be discarded in association with the effect information set to the high priority (priority 1) are executed.

  When the related effect setting process (S6402) is executed, first, whether there is effect information indicating a specific effect having a related effect in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa It discriminates (S6501). That is, it is determined whether the effect to be executed with the highest priority is a specific effect that defines a related effect (other effects to be executed in association or any other effects to be associated and discarded). In the process of S6501, when it is determined that the effect information indicating the specific effect is not stored (S6501: No), there is no need to perform the process relating to the related effect, so this process is ended and the effect mode setting process ( It returns to S5321 of FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect information indicating the specific effect is stored in the process of S6501 (S6501: Yes), then, the effect information associated with the specific effect is any of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa If it is determined that it is not stored (S6503: No), it is not necessary to perform processing relating to related effects, so this processing ends as it is. The process returns to the mode setting process (S5321 in FIG. 106).

  If it is determined in the process of S6502 that the effect information associated with the specific effect is stored in any of the storage areas of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa (S6502: Yes), then the related effect is associated with If it is determined that it is a string effect (S6503: Yes), the execution timing of the string effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap. It is determined whether or not (S6504).

  Here, when it is determined that the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap (S6504: Yes), the execution timing of the stringing effect is the already stored execution timing. As processing to correct to different execution timing, rewrite the execution timing of the stringing effect before (5 seconds before) the execution timing of the specific effect (S6505), and set the priority of the stringing effect to 1.5 (S6506), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6504 that the execution timing of the linking effect and the execution timing of the specific effect do not overlap (S6504), there is no need to correct the execution timing of each effect, so The process is skipped and this process ends.

  That is, when the effect information corresponding to the stringing effect is stored among the related effects specified in the specific effect, the execution timing of the stringing effect included in the effect information is the execution of the specific effect Execute processing to rewrite before the timing (the timing to the extent that the specific effect is executed after the stringing effect is finished), and further, the priority included in the effect information corresponding to the stringing effect is the specific effect A process of rewriting and setting to a special priority (1.5 in the present embodiment), which is the second highest priority, is executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect with low priority (stringing effect) alone by linking it to a specific effect with high priority, so that only an effect with high priority is executed, It is possible to solve the problem of getting bored early in the game. Furthermore, when the stringing effect is executed by correcting the execution timing so that the stringing effect with low priority is executed before the specific effect, the specific effect is subsequently executed. In this case, the player can be made to think, and it is possible to enjoy playing a game while predicting the contents of the effect to be executed in the future.

  In addition, for a player who has experience in which the low priority string rendering is performed alone, the execution timing of the string rendering is corrected by grasping that the execution timing of the string rendering is different from before. Since it can be determined in advance, it is possible to give a player who has been playing for a long time a sense of superiority. In order to exert this effect strongly, it is preferable to execute the correction process so that the execution timing after the correction in the process of S6505 becomes an execution timing that can not be set when it is executed alone. Further, it may be configured to execute a suggested effect that suggests that the execution timing has been corrected.

  In the present embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect after the end of the stringing effect, the process of correcting the execution timing of the stringing effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific effect is executed The timing may be corrected (delayed), or a specific effect may be performed after the end of the stringing effect by performing correction to shorten the effect period of the stringing effect. In addition, the linking effect may be executed before the specific effect is executed, and the execution timing and the effect period may be corrected such that the specific effect is executed during the execution of the string effect.

  Referring back to FIG. 107, the description will be continued. In the process of S6503, when it is determined that it is not a tied effect (S6503: No), that is, it is determined that the related effect stored in any storage area of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa is not a tied effect If it is determined that the related effect is an exclusion effect (S6507), and if it is determined that the effect is an exclusion effect (S6507: Yes), effect hierarchy storage area groups corresponding to the effect information corresponding to the exclusion effect It is cleared (discarded) from the storage area of 223 aa, and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S6507 that the effect is not an exclusion effect (S6507: No), the process of S6508 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  As described above, different timings in the present embodiment (timing to set the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1, opportunity to set the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2, opportunity to set the holding effect when the number of holding balls changes) Since various effects (button effects, display effects) are set at different timings, the execution timings of the various effects set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa are variously set according to the timing of formation of each opportunity. Thus, the effect setting process in each opportunity can be simplified by determining the effect mode, priority, and execution timing of various effects set irregularly and determining the effect to be actually performed.

  In addition, since it is possible to set the effect mode (execution timing of each effect) to be executed only when the timing when the specific effects are executed overlaps by chance, it is possible to use a combination of separate and independent setting opportunities. It is possible to carry out the effects. Therefore, the effects of various patterns which can not be easily predicted by the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, a combination of effects not intended to be executed during one time of variable effects is defined in advance, and when one effect is executed, the other effect is excluded. Since the processing is performed, it is possible to suppress the execution of a combination of effects that give the player a sense of discomfort or disbelief.

  Referring back to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. When the process of S6402 is completed, it is next determined whether the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae is set to on (S6403), and if it is determined that the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae is not set to on (S6403: No), the rendering hierarchy storage area When the processing of S6404 to S6406 for setting the rendering mode is performed on the rendering information stored in all the storage areas of the group 223aa, and it is determined that the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON. (S6403: Yes), execute the processing of S6407 and S6408 to set the rendering mode for only the rendering information stored in the first rendering layer storage area 223ab among the rendering layer storage area group 223a, S6409 Move to the process of

  Here, in the process of S6404, the effect execution period of each effect is calculated based on the effect information set (stored) in the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the first effect layer storage area 223ad. It extracts (S6404), specifies the storage area where the rendering information is set in the priority 1 area in the order of the 1st effect layer storage area 223ab, the 2nd effect layer storage area 223ac, and the 1st effect layer storage area 223ad An effect mode corresponding to the effect information of each priority 1 area is set so that the execution periods do not overlap (S6405).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the priority order is defined also for a plurality of storage areas, and the priority order of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad Is defined. Therefore, when the rendering information in which the execution periods overlap is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab 1 of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab and the priority 1 area 233ac 1 of the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac. The rendering mode corresponding to the rendering information set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first rendering hierarchy storage area 223ab is set.

  On the other hand, when different execution periods are specified in the effect information set (stored) in the priority 1 area of each storage area, the effect mode corresponding to all the effect information is set. Thereby, in the fluctuation presentation corresponding to one special drawing fluctuation, first, only the presentation mode having the highest priority is set. As a result, it is possible to properly provide the player with an effect to be preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, the priority is defined in the order of the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab, the second effect hierarchy storage area 223ac, and the third effect hierarchy storage area 223ad, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation effects are not limited. When setting, the priority may be set randomly. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the presentation mode to be executed preferentially, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in interest.

  After the process of S6405, next, the effect information to be executed is selected from the stored effect information in the order of priority 2 area to priority 4 area so that the effect execution periods do not overlap, and the selected effect information The effect mode corresponding to is set (S6406). At this time, the stringing effect set in the process of S6402 is set prior to the other effect information. In addition, the effect information excluded (cleared) in the process of S6402 is excluded from the selection targets. Then, a display command indicating a variable effect corresponding to each effect mode set in the processes of S6405 and S6406 is set (S6409), and this process is ended.

  Next, in the process of S6407, the effect execution period included in the information set in the first effect hierarchy storage area 223ab is extracted (S6407), and effect information whose effect execution periods do not overlap is selected in descending order of priority. The effect mode corresponding to the selected effect information is set (S6408), and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S6409, and the present process is ended.

  Next, contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of button pressing process 2 (S5853). This button pressing process 2 (S5853) is configured in such a way that an effect level selection process (S6221) is added to the button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) of the first embodiment described above. Different, otherwise identical. About the same processing content, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  When the button pressing process 2 (S5853) is executed, first, the effect level selecting process (S6221) is executed, and then the processes of S6201 to S6209 identical to the button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) described above are executed. And the process ends. Here, the contents of the effect level selection process executed in the process of S 6221 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect level selection process (S 6221). In this effect level selection process (S 6221), a process for selecting the amount (level) of an effect to be executed by the player is executed. In this embodiment, effect information indicating various effects can be set (stored) in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and among the effect information set (stored), the effect information set (stored) can be set. The player can select whether to determine the effect to be actually executed.

  By configuring in this way, for example, a player who likes to perform lively effects is set in more storage areas by executing a plurality of effects at various timings (including overlapping). ) The presentation information being the target is the target for determining the presentation to be executed, and a player who likes to perform a simple presentation executes the presentation information set (stored) in a small storage area It can be used as a target when determining the effect, and can perform the effect of the amount desired by each player.

  When the effect level selection process (S 6221) is executed, first, the current time is on the demo screen (the special condition variation is not being performed, and the standby condition (for example, the special condition variation is not being performed continues for 3 seconds or more) If it is determined that the demo screen is in progress (S6601: Yes), then whether the first frame button 22a is turned on It is determined whether (pressed or not) (S6602).

  If it is determined in the process of S6602 that the first frame button 22a is on (S6602: Yes), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22b is on (pressed or not) (S6603). If it is determined (S6603: Yes), it is determined whether the current setting condition of the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is ON (S6604). If it is determined in the process of S6604 that the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6604: YES), the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae is set to OFF (S6605), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6604: No), the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6606), and this processing is finish.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the predetermined state (during the demo screen), the special operation (the operation of simultaneously pressing the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) is performed on the operation means. By doing this, the setting of the simultaneous rendering prohibition flag 223ae can be switched. Thereby, the player can easily set a desired effect level (amount).

  Although detailed description is omitted, the current setting condition of simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223 ae, that is, the amount of effect to be executed, in the area where the player can easily visually recognize like the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The presentation level information for indicating (the presentation level) is displayed. As a result, the player can variably set the effect level based on the amount and content of the effect that is actually executed and the effect level information that is displayed. In addition, as a display mode displayed in the demo screen, a method of variably setting the effect level is displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, information of various effects to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set at various setting timings, and the sound lamp is displayed. A display command corresponding to an effect to be actually executed is displayed based on the information stored in the storage unit (representation hierarchy storage area group 223aa) stored in the control device 113 and based on the information stored in the storage unit at each presentation execution timing. Although the configuration for outputting to the control device 114 is used, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a command indicating information on various effects set at various setting triggers is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 The storage means (the storage means corresponding to the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa) of the side is stored, and the effect to be executed according to the execution timing of the effect is stored in the storage means It may be configured to determine based on the information.

  Also, in this case, information indicating the content of the execution effect set on the display control device 114 side is output to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and based on the information received from the display control device 114 on the audio lamp control device 113 side. It is good to configure to set a new effect. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not to set a new effect according to the situation of the effect that is actually being executed.

  In the second embodiment, the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as operation means operable by the player, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the third symbol may be used. A touch sensor in which a detection range is set at a position facing the display screen of the display device 81 (position in front of the display screen) may be used. The touch sensor is a non-contact type detection unit, and is an operation unit that determines that an operation has been made by detecting that the player has entered a hand within the detection range.

  When such a touch sensor is used, the detection range of the touch sensor is provided at a position facing the display screen. For example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 By displaying the comment and the character, and setting the display position of the character to a position overlapping the detection range of the touch sensor, the player can be made to operate the operation means (touch sensor) positively. .

  Furthermore, in the case where the decoration variable member that can be varied to a position covering the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the gaming machine provided with the touch sensor described above, at least a predetermined first position (initial position A variable member capable of moving (varying) between the second position (operating position) and the second position (operating position), and the variable member is variably operated when the player operates the operating means (first frame button 22a) The decorative variable member moved to the second position intrudes into the detection range of the touch sensor, and the button effect using the first frame button 22a (variable operation of the decorative variable member) While the effect to be performed) is being performed, there arises a problem that the button effect using the touch sensor can not be performed.

  In such a case, it is preferable that a part of information in the effect contents of each button effect set in duplicate is rewritten to execute the overlapping button effect. Specifically, at the timing of executing each button effect, the position of the decorative variable member and the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are determined, and based on the determination result, it is determined in advance. It is good to constitute so that the information which shows the contents of operation to the operation means used as the operation object among the production modes of the button production defined, and the operation means may be rewritten. Thus, without changing the display mode of the button effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the button effect can be performed in an overlapping manner.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode (effect content, execution timing, execution period, priority, etc.) of each effect is set independently at each setting opportunity, and effects based on information indicating the set effect mode are set. It is good to constitute so that it may be performed, after performing the execution timing amendment processing which amends the execution timing of a production mode set up independently by each setting opportunity, although it is constituted. By configuring in this way, for example, when the button effect is set in a plurality of setting occasions and the plurality of button effects are performed in duplicate, the operation effective period set corresponding to each button effect is 0 When there is a one-second shift, it is possible to correct the 0.1-second shift and simultaneously perform an effect such that the operation effective period is set. Therefore, the rendering effect can be enhanced. In addition, instead of correcting the effect mode of each effect set actually, only the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is corrected, and, for example, the player is notified of the operation effective period. The timing at which the display mode (gauge 817a) for display is displayed may be synchronized.

  In addition, in the case of having the effect mode in which the variable member for decoration is variably operated as the effect mode of the button effect, the variable member for decoration is previously positioned at the initial position before performing the button effect. It is necessary to execute processing (preparation processing) and processing (origin confirmation processing) for determining whether the decorative variable member is positioned at the initial position. In addition, in a state where the decorative variable member is variable (a position at the operation position), when the button effect is switched to another button effect (button effect with high priority), the player If the decorative variable member is located at a position covering the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it interferes with other effects, and the entire pachinko machine 10 There is a risk that the rendering effect as will be significantly reduced.

  Therefore, high priority (priority 1) is set to the button effect in which the effect mode for changing the decoration variable member is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the rendering effect of the entire pachinko machine 10 is significantly reduced due to the execution of the other button effects. In addition, it is not limited to the configuration described above, and only various effects for moving the decorative variable member are stored in another storage area (variable effect storage area) having a plurality of different priorities, and stored in the variable effect storage area The present invention may be configured to determine the presence information in a priority manner, and to determine the presence / absence of execution of various effects stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa based on the determination result. Thereby, while being able to perform the variable production which changes the variable member for decoration with priority over other production, it is possible to give priority to the execution in the variable production.

  Further, in the first and second embodiments described above, as described with reference to FIG. 8, the player is notified of the operation valid period of the operation means, and the operation means is operated within the operation valid period. Although the button effect for causing the player to operate is provided, in addition to this, a special button effect to be executed based on the player operating the operation means may be provided. Specifically, when the operating means is operated in a partial period in a period in which the button effect is not performed, without notifying the player of the operation effective period, the display screen of the three symbol display device 81 is displayed. A special button effect may be provided in which effects (a lively effect) for changing various effect modes being executed are executed.

  In this case, a special timer different from the button valid timer set based on the execution of the button effect described above is provided, and it is determined that the predetermined button operation is performed while the predetermined period is set by the special timer. In this case, the special button effect may be performed, or the special button effect may be performed by overlapping each button effect. As described above, since the special button effect does not notify the player of the effective period of operation, even if the special button effect is performed overlapping with other button effects, the effect is duplicated without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can be performed.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of gaming state set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the device 113 is different.

  In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery (special figure 2 lottery) are simultaneously (parallel) Was configured to be run. On the other hand, the third embodiment is different in that the special figure 2 lottery is executed with priority over the special figure 1 lottery.

  And, in this third embodiment, when winning a big hit of a special symbol, a probability change state (until next big win is won) as a gaming state set after the end of the big hit game executed based on the big hit win And one of the time saving states (until the jackpot is won, the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times, or until the jackpot is won) is set.

  In other words, if a definite change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are continuously set until the next big jackpot is won, so a positive change state is set The chances of being able to win many prize balls were extremely high. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to continue the probability change state with high probability, and by providing the possibility of causing the player to obtain many winning balls, game prosperity is increased. As a measure to prevent the problem, a measure is considered to reduce the probability that the probability change state continues (for example, the percentage of the probability change state continues to be 65% or less).

  By taking such measures, it becomes possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not give the player excessive expectations for the winning balls, but as in the prior art, the probability change state is high. In the effect (effect for showing the lottery result of a special symbol) used in the pachinko machine 10 which continues with probability (for example, 80%), when used for the pachinko machine 10 which took measures, the presentation effect However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  Specifically, during the jackpot game, when the character of the player battles against the enemy character and wins the battle, in a battle effect informing that the positive change state is set after the end of the present jackpot game. If the probability that the probability change state continues decreases, the winning rate of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game decreases, and the player's sense of expectation (a probability change state is set when the battle effect is executed. There is a problem that the feeling of expectation for the game is diminished, and the game will decline.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the continuous battle effect of continuing the battle effect from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of a predetermined end condition (for example, 30 special pattern changes) is satisfied. When the jackpot is won during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the satisfaction of the predetermined termination condition, an effect for winning the battle is executed. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle effect can be increased, and a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the player wins a probability change jackpot (a jackpot for which a probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game), a battle effect for winning the battle during the jackpot game is executed, The continuous battle effect is executed only when the player wins the jackpot) in which the time saving state is set after the game is over. This can further increase the probability of winning in the battle effect.

  In addition, during the continuous battle rendition, it is configured to make the rendition result of the continuation battle different according to the type of the jackpot which is won, for example, the battle victory rendition if It is configured to execute a battle rematch production if it is executed and a time junior high is won during continuous battle production. In this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the defeat presentation losing to the battle when the junior high school hit is won during the continuous battle production. Therefore, since the frequency with which defeat production is performed after battle production is performed can be reduced, the ratio of a battle victory can be raised relatively.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is located below the gaming area 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The second embodiment is different in that the first ball entrance 164 is disposed instead of the ball entry unit 64. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, while the normal state is set as the gaming state, a game is performed in which the ball is made to enter the first ball entrance 164 by left-handling game, and a special figure 1 lottery is performed. The game aiming at the jackpot is executed. Then, when the jackpot is won and a definite change state or a time reduction state is set as the game state, a game is performed in which a ball is inserted into the second ball entry port 640 by the right-handed game.

<About the contents of effects in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111 to FIG. 114, the characteristic rendering contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing a flow of effects executed during a special game variation after a big hit game and during a big game. As shown in FIG. 111, in the present embodiment, a battle effect (probability change suggestion effect) for suggesting the gaming state after the big hit game to the player during the big hit game is executed, depending on the type of the big win It is configured such that the execution period of the battle effect is made different, and the effect success rate (battle winning rate) in the battle effect is enhanced, and the player's expectation for the battle effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), when a probability change jackpot is won, an effect to win the battle in the battle effect (see FIG. 111 (A)) executed during the jackpot game. (See FIG. 111 (B)) is executed. Here, the contents of the effects of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 112 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display content displayed when the battle effect is executed, and FIG. 112 (b) is a display displayed when the battle is won in the battle effect It is a schematic diagram showing an example of contents. Since FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) are schematic diagrams showing a display example executed during the short time state, the display mode of the small area Dm1 and the small area Dm2 shows the short time state. Since the aspect of the battle effect executed in the main display area Dm is the same as the battle effect executed during the big hit game, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b). Further, among the elements of the display screen shown in FIG. 112A, the same elements as those of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, when a battle effect is executed, an effect in which a character 817 imitating a hero and an enemy character 818 imitating a monster are battled is executed as shown in FIG. 112 (a). Then, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 and the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 are displayed, and an effect is executed in which the character whose physical strength gauge has become zero is lost.

  Above the main display area Dm, a victory notification mode Dm7, a re-war notification mode Dm8, and a defeat notification mode Dm9 are displayed as a result notification mode for notifying the result of the battle effect. These notification modes Dm7 to Dm9 are all displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (a) immediately after the battle effect is started, and there is a case where the effect result completely denied is generated with the progress of the battle effect. Is configured to hide the corresponding notification mode. As a result, the player can predict the effect of the battle effect before the effect of the battle effect (the outcome of the battle) is informed.

  In addition, on the lower left side of the main display area Dm, a prize ball display area Dm5 is formed in which prize ball number information for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game is displayed, and a value of "1000" is displayed. ing. Further, a number-of-rounds display area Dm6 for indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game is formed on the right side thereof, and a value of "8" is displayed. Note that, as described above, FIG. 112 (a) shows the display contents of the battle effect (continuous battle effect) during the time saving state, so that it is a gaming state in which the big hit game is actually finished.

  In such a gaming state, by displaying the prize ball display area Dm5 and the number-of-rounds display area Dm6, the player is currently playing a big hit (for example, during an interval period or an ending period between round games) It can be made to think that it can be thought that it is an effect being carried out during a jackpot game. In FIG. 112 (a), the small area Dm1 and the small area Dm2 are displayed large in order to explain the current gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner. It is displayed in a size that is difficult to identify.

  Then, at the time of FIG. 111 (B), the effect of winning the battle shown in FIG. 112 (b) is executed. In FIG. 112 (b), the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 becomes 0, the effect of losing the character 818 is displayed, and only the victory notification mode Dm7 is displayed. By executing this battle victory effect, the player is notified that the probability change state is set as the gaming state.

  Referring back to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. After winning the battle, the effect during the definite change state is executed, and if the jackpot is won again during the definite change state (time short-score hit), the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is executed until 30 times after the end of the big hit game. (See FIG. 112 (a)). Then, when special pattern fluctuation is executed 30 times after the time saving state is set, an effect of defeating the battle (defeat effect) is executed (see FIG. 111C). Here, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the contents of the effect when defeated in the battle effect will be described. FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of display content at the time of battle defeat.

  As shown in FIG. 113A, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 becomes 0, the effect of losing the character 817 is displayed, and only the defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed. By executing this battle defeat effect, it is informed that the time saving state is set as the gaming state. In the present embodiment, at the time when the battle defeat effect is executed, it is the time when 30 times out of 100 times of the time saving set as the short time state, so after FIG. 113A is displayed. As shown in FIG. 114 (b) as a display during the short time state (see FIG. 111D), the remaining short number display area Dm11 indicating the remaining period of the short time state is “69” as the remaining short time number. The value is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the battle effect is executed during the period from the setting of the time saving state until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the probability that the victory effect is executed in the battle effect As it is possible to increase (the probability of winning a probability change jackpot within 30 times in a short time state) and to reduce the number of time reductions to be performed after a defeat effect is performed in a battle effect, a low special symbol It is possible to shorten the duration of the short game, which is performed in a state in which it is determined that the probability state is set, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Referring back to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), when winning in a definite change big hit (in the 25th special drawing lottery after the time reduction state is set) during continuous battle rendition, the battle wins during the positive change big hit game The effect of is executed (see FIG. 112 (b)). As a result, internally, after shifting to a short time state (in the prior art, after the defeat production is performed in the battle production), the battle is in spite of being in a state of winning the probability variation jackpot Only the victory effect can be executed without executing the defeat effect of the effect. Therefore, the victory probability in battle production can be relatively raised.

  In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 111 (b), since an example is shown in which the number of rounds is small as a probability variation jackpot (ceremony variation jackpot (2R)), the demonstration result of the continuous battle effect is displayed during the jackpot game However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in the case of winning a (16R) probability variation jackpot having a large number of rounds, if it is determined that 16 round probability variation jackpots are to be won according to a prefetch result, It may be configured to execute the victory effect of the continuous battle effect and the jackpot effect, and then execute the victory effect again in the battle effect executed during the jackpot game.

  In addition, the interval period set after the end of the eighth round of the 16 round jackpot game is set longer than the other interval periods (for example, one minute), and the effect result of the continuous battle effect is made by the eighth round of the first half. Then, display the presentation result indicating that the jackpot has been won by the pseudo-representation effect to execute the special map fluctuation in a pseudo manner during the interval period of the eighth round, using the second half of the eight rounds, during the jackpot game It may be configured to execute the battle effect of. By configuring in this way, more victory effects can be performed.

  In this case, the interval period after the eighth round of the sixteenth round jackpot game may be configured to be different according to the gaming state, for example, a state in which a probability change state is set (continuous battle effect is executed In the case where the interval period is not set, an interval period having a length similar to that of the other interval periods may be set, and an interval period of a long period may be set only in a state in which the time saving state is set. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming efficiency due to an unnecessarily long interval period being set in the 16 round probability variation jackpots won during the probability variation state.

  In addition, when the time saving state is set, it is more preferable to configure a long interval period to be set only for the 16 round probability variation jackpot won within 30 times of the special figure fluctuation after the time saving state is set. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), if the player is elected as a result of continuous battle rendition (2R) during continuous battle rendition (the 20th to special figure fluctuation after setting the shortness state), re-ward rendition as a rendition of the continued battle rendition Is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 113 (b), the contents of the rematch effect will be described. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display content displayed when the battle rendition production result is a rematch. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the character 817 is displayed in a posture to fight again, and in the state where the physical strength gauge 817a remains, a command 816 of "another game" is displayed, which indicates that the battle effect is to be executed again. And the rewar notification mode Dm 8 is displayed. In this case, the small display area Dm2 displays a display mode of "222" indicating a jackpot winning.

  In the present embodiment, since the defeat effect is executed when the special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times after the time reduction state is set as the continuous battle effect described above, the continuous battle effect is being performed. An effect is performed in which the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 decreases in accordance with the number of times the special drawing variation is executed. Then, when the time reduction number 30, which is the end condition of the continuous battle effect, approaches, the display content shown in FIG. 114 (a) is displayed. FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display content in the case where the number of times of time saving is the 30th during continuous battle rendition.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the physical fitness gauge 817a decreases according to the number of times of special figure variation performed during continuous battle rendition, and a suggestion mode that suggests defeat of the battle (FIG. 114 (a) shakes) The defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed in the mode). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the 30th time change with the physical strength gauge 817a reduced, so that it is possible to execute the battle defeat rendering without a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the time reduction number is 30 times (the number of times of special figure fluctuation after the time reduction state is set to 30 times) as an end condition of the continuous battle effect (battle effect to be executed during the time reduction state). Although the case is set as the end condition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of special figure fluctuation that satisfies the end condition may be variably set by the effect drawing means. In this case, a jackpot type may be provided in which a value other than 100 (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is over.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle effect is executed, and to make it difficult for the player to recognize the remaining number of shortings after the end of the continuous battle effect.

  In addition, as a guarantee period notification effect in which the player is notified of a period (battle effect guarantee period) in which the continuous battle effect does not end, for example, the physical fitness gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, it does not lose The effect indicating the invincible mode may be configured to be executable, and the period in which the invincible mode continues may be notified.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the termination condition of continuation battle production may be set based on the number of times of special figure change in time saving state, it does not restrict to this, for example, the lottery result of a special symbol is other than a big hit In a part of the game machine configured to be able to win the player a small bonus (a bonus different from the big hit game) less than the big hit game, the small hit game is based on the small hit win (small hit game execution It is good to constitute so that the end condition of continuation battle production is satisfied.

  In this case, it is preferable to execute a small hit game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big hit game is opened as a small hit game to be executed at the time of the small hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a defeat effect of losing the battle during a period when the variable winning device 65 is in an open operation, so the player is subjected to the defeat effect during the jackpot game. It can make you think.

  Furthermore, it is preferable that the continuous battle effect be terminated based on the condition established earlier among the winnings in the special hit during the time saving state, the number of times the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). . Thus, it is possible to suppress the continuation battle effect from becoming excessively long and to make the continuation period of the continuation battle effect indefinite.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The third embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPI 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 115 is a schematic view showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 115, the ROM 202 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in the first random number table 202a, and the first random number 3 table 202ba is selected as a big hit type. The difference is that a jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is provided instead of the table 202d, and the other is the same. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 203ba. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number 3 table 203ba differs only in the value defined for the first random number table 203a described above, and is otherwise identical. Specifically, when the gaming state is low certainty (the low probability state of the special symbol), the jackpot is defined in the range of “0, 1” of the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired, and the gaming state is In the case of high probability (high probability state of special symbol), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined as a jackpot within the range of "2 to 11".

  Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb, and FIG. 117 (b) is the special figure 1 jackpot type possessed by the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb. FIG. 117 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the selection table 202bb1, and FIG. 117 (c) shows the contents defined in the special view 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 included in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb. It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb wins a jackpot in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, the special figure 1 jackpot type for selecting the jackpot type The selection table 202bb1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 for selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery, and has a jackpot Different jackpot types are selected according to the type of the special symbol won.

  Special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202bb1 is a data table in which three types of jackpot types (jacks A to C) are defined as shown in FIG. 117 (b), and the acquired first hit type counter C2 Each jackpot type is defined according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "big hit A" in the range of "0 to 49" and in the range of "big hit B" and "65 to 99" in the range of "50 to 64" A "big hit C" is defined.

  Here, the jackpot type "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h Is a jackpot type for which “10000” is set. The jackpot type "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a definite change state is set after the end of the big hit game, the definite change flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "10000 Is a jackpot type to be set. The jackpot type "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which eight rounds of jackpot games are executed and time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100 Is a jackpot type to be set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 wins the jackpot, the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game with a probability of 65%, and the time saving state is set with a probability of 35%. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle (informing the fact that the positive change state is set after the big hit game is finished during the big hit game) in the battle effect executed during the big hit game is at most 65%.

  The special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 is a data table in which five types of jackpot types (jacks D to H) are defined as shown in FIG. 117 (c), and the acquired first hit type counter C2 Each jackpot type is defined according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0-24”, the “big hit D”, the range of “25-34”, the range of “big hit E”, “35-64” The "big hit F" is defined, the "big hit G" is defined in the range of "65 to 89", and the "big hit H" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

  Here, the jackpot type "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which 2 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h Is a jackpot type for which “10000” is set. The jackpot type "jackpot E" is a jackpot type of the same content as "jackpot A" described above, and "jackpot F" is the jackpot type of the same content as "jackpot B" described above.

  The "big hit G" is a big hit type in which two rounds of big hit games are executed and time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100". It is a jackpot type to be set, and "jackpot H" is the same jackpot type as "jackpot C" described above.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even when winning a big hit in the special figure 2, the probability change state is set after the big hit game is finished with the probability of 65% the same as when winning a big hit in the special figure 1, probability of 35% The time saving state is set. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle (informing the fact that the positive change state is set after the big hit game is finished during the big hit game) in the battle effect executed during the big hit game is at most 65%.

  In addition, the percentage (30%) in which the "big hit F" which is the big hit type that is most advantageous to the player is selected is selected by the "big hit B" in the special figure 1 (the big hit type of the same content as the "big hit F"). Is set higher than the rate (15%). Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery is a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration defined in the RAM 203 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 according to the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment in that a probability variation flag 203ba is provided instead of the probability variation counter 203g. The other configuration is the same, the same reference numeral is given to the same configuration, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The probability change flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the special symbol is set. This probability change flag 203ba is a jackpot ("jack, A, B, D, E, jackpot to set a probability change state after the jackpot end in the jackpot type of this time in the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551 in FIG. 124) executed at the end of jackpot game. It is set to ON when it is F '), and it is set to off when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot and the jackpot is won (when the jackpot game is started).

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119, the present embodiment is different in that the in-battle flag 223ca is added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, and the other points are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The battle flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed, and is set to ON when the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed. . The in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON when the jackpot game to be executed based on the jackpot which is won in a state where the battle effect is not executed is started (see S6704 in FIG. 128), and the voice lamp control device 113 When setting up various effects, it is referred to in order to determine whether a battle effect is currently being performed. Then, in the battle effect update process (see S4651 in FIG. 126) of the state command reception process 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125), the termination condition of the battle effect is satisfied (the number of short remaining times reaches 70 times When the number of times of figure fluctuation reaches 30)), it is set to OFF (see S6657 in FIG. 126).

<About control processing of main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124, contents of control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are not simultaneously (parallelly) executed, This is largely different from the control processing of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above in that the drawing (variation) of the special view 2 is executed with priority. The other contents are the same. Therefore, in the third embodiment, only the contents of the control process relating to the above-described difference will be described, and the description of the other contents will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 120, the contents of special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is a special figure when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the process of being varied with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). The point that is configured to execute the process to start the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in preference to 1 and the process of updating the gaming state (update of the value of the time counter 223h), the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol Instead of timing, it is different in that it is configured to be executed at the stop timing of the special symbol.

  First, with reference to FIG. 120, special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In this special symbol variation processing 3, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S251). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S251: Yes), the present processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S252: No), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1)) and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (The number of holding N2 of the variable display in the second special symbol) is acquired (S253). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S254), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e should not be 0. (S254: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S255), and the number of holding balls indicating the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation The command is set (S256). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S2401) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 is voice It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223 d.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S256, the data stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S257). In the process of S257, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After the process of S257 is executed, the second special symbol variation start process 3 is executed (S258), and this process is ended. The second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S254, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S254: No), next, of the acquired first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S259). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S259: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S259, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S259: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d Is decremented by 1 (S260), and a ball holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S261). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S2401) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S261, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S262). In the process of S262, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the first special symbol variation start process 3 is executed (S263). The first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S252, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S264). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If S has not passed (S 264: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S 265), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S264, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S264: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) and a first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) described later with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. When the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) is executed, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area A lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area provided commonly to 203b. More specifically, according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is determined is determined, and in the case of the jackpot of the special symbol, the jackpot according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S266 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). And, when the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, it is performed by the second special symbol fluctuation start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol fluctuation start process 3 (S263) It is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) is the jackpot of the special symbol (S267). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S267: Yes), set the big hit scenario, set the probability change flag 203ba to off, set the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 0 (S268), the big hit flag Set 203 m to ON (S 269). Then, a stop command is set (S270), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S267, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S267: No), the game state update process 3 (S271) is executed. The game state update process 3 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S270), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258). The second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the second special symbol holding ball Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third This is a process for determining the effect pattern (the variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 81.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258), first, various data stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, change type counter Each value of CS1) is acquired (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in a probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S1602). The determination as to whether or not it is a definite change period is performed by determining whether the positive change flag 203ba is on. The probability variation counter flag 203aa is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpots A, B, D, E, F. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S1602: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to the process of S1603. In the process of S1603, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S1601 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (first hit random number table) 202a, the lottery result of whether the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired (S1603). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first random number table) 202a. As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set (see FIG. 15 (a)) as random number values for the special symbols in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols), as shown in FIG. When the value of the random number counter C1 per unit and the random number value corresponding to the per-unit match, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S1605.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1602 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed. In the process of S1604, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S1601 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (first random number table) 202a, the lottery result of whether the jackpot of the special symbol is or not Acquire (S1604). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first random number table) 202a. Two random numbers "0, 1" are set as the jackpot random numbers for the special symbol in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol), and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when the random numbers match. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S1605.

  In the process of S1605, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S1603 or S1604 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table ( Determine whether it matches the judgment value set in the first hit random number table) 202a) (S1605), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1605: Yes), it is acquired by the processing of S1601 Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S1606). More specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1601 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2, and the jackpot type (D to H) is what Determine if

  In the process of S1606, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type. Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S1607). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1607, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal change pattern selection table 202b1.

  In the fluctuation pattern, the main control unit 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol to notify of the result of the judgment of acceptance, and notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the determination of success or failure. In the main controller 110, even in the display mode of the outreach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the display mode of the out which is not the reach display mode as long as the change time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for outliers, various types of “short out”, “long out”, “outside normal reach”, and “outside super reach” are defined. As a variation pattern of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D common use, various kinds of "normal reach" and various kinds of "super reach" are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S1605: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S1608). In the process of S1608, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the display mode corresponding to the symbol is set, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b Based on the value, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S1609). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S1608, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as super reach.

  When the process of S1607 or S1609 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S1607 or S1609 is set (S1610). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1607 or S1609 is set (S1611). When the process of S1611 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 3 (S131).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S263). In this first special symbol variation start process (S263), the type of the special symbol to be processed is changed from the special figure 1 to the special figure 2 with respect to the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) described above The difference is that the various counters, tables, and the like for the special figure 2 are changed to various counters, tables, and the like for the special figure 1 according to the difference. Since the other contents are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the game state update processing 3 (S271) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 3 (S271). This game state update process 3 (S271) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and a process of subtracting the value of the time short counter 203h Is a process for updating the gaming state based on the subtracted value and setting a state command indicating the updated gaming state.

  When the gaming state update process 3 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the current is a high probability state (time reduction state, probability change state) of a normal symbol. (S851). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S851: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S852), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is 0. (S853).

  When it is determined in the process of S853 that the value of the hour counter 203h is 0 (S853: Yes), the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state storage area is set (S854), and the current gaming state (time counter 203h) The state command indicating the value of (the set state of the probability change flag 203ba) is set (S871), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S851: No), or in the process of S853, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 0 ( If it is determined that the value is greater than 0) (S853: No), the process proceeds to the process of S871.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the probability change flag 203ba is set to ON after winning the jackpot game is won, “10000” is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the end of the jackpot game, and the probability change flag 203ba is When the jackpot is not set to ON, "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when winning a big hit the probability change flag 203ba is set to ON after the end of the big hit game, in fact, from the end of the big hit game until the next big hit winning probability change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability State) is set, if the probability change flag 203ba is not set to ON after winning the jackpot game is won, after the jackpot game is over, until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (a low probability status of the special symbol , The high probability state of the symbol will be set.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot end process 3 (S2551) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 3 (S2551). In the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551), the setting of the probability change flag 203ba and the setting of the time saving counter 203h are performed at the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type of the jackpot won.

  When the jackpot end process 3 (S2551) is executed, first, it is judged whether or not the jackpot type of this time is "jackpot A, B, D, E, F" (S2751), "jackpot A, B, D, If it is determined that it is E, F (S2751: Yes), the probability change flag 203ba is set to ON (S2752), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "10000" (S2753), and the large hit medium flag is turned off. The command is set to (S2754), a command indicating a change in gaming state (a command indicating the current gaming state) is set (S2704), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2751 that the present jackpot type is not "Jumping A, B, D, E, F" (S2751: No), "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h ( S2755) Go to the processing of S2754.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128, the contents of control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, state command reception processing 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125) is replaced with state command reception processing (see S4212 in FIG. 64) with respect to control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The special figure fluctuation start process (see S4291 in FIG. 127) is executed instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61). And a jackpot start process (see S4212 in FIG. 128) as a subroutine of the jackpot related process (see S5002 in FIG. 66). Since the processing content other than that is the same, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, contents of status command reception processing 3 (S4252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command reception processing 3 (S4252). This state command reception process 3 (S4252) is different from the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) of the first embodiment described above in that battle effect update process (S4651) is added and executed. Do. Since the processing content other than that is the same, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When state command reception processing 3 (S4252) is executed, first, battle effect update processing is executed (S4651), and then processing of S4601 to S4604 identical to the above-described state command reception processing (see S4212 of FIG. 64) Run. Here, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the gaming state has been changed to a state other than the normal state (S4602: No), it is then determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to on (S4652). If it is determined that is set to (S4652: Yes), since the battle effect (continuation battle effect) is displayed, the process of changing the display content accompanying the transition to the game state is not executed, S4610 And the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4652 that the under battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4652: No), the processes of S4605 to S4610 that are the same as the state command reception process described above (see S4212 of FIG. 64). To complete this process.

  Next, the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651). In the battle effect update process (S4651), in battle effect (continuous battle effect) in the time-shortened state, a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the update of the number of time-shortened times is executed.

  When the battle effect update process (S4651) is executed, it is first determined whether the flag under battle 223ca is set to on (S6651), and it is determined that the flag is not set to on (set to off). In this case, since there is no need to update the battle effect, the process ends. On the other hand, the battle flag 223ca is set to on. That is, if it is determined that the present is the battle effect (S6651: Yes), it is then determined whether the present time is in the short time state (S6652).

  The process of S6652 is executed by reading out the information indicating the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k. If it is determined in the process of S6652 that the current time is not in the time saving state (S6652: No), since the current is in the jackpot game, there is no need to execute the process of updating the battle effect, so this process ends Do. If it is determined that the current time is in the short time state (S6652: Yes), next, based on the information indicating the remaining time of the short time state included in the state command received this time (information indicating the number of short times remaining). The value of the remaining short number of times is updated and set in the slave state setting area 223k.

  When the process of S6653 is finished, as a result of updating the value of the remaining short number of times, it is determined whether the remaining short number of times has reached 70 times (S6654), and it is determined not 70 times, that is, 71-99 times In the case (S6654: No), a display command indicating the physical strength gauge value according to the currently set number of remaining shorts is set (S6655), and this processing ends. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S6655, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), it corresponds to the remaining number of short times as the display mode of the physical fitness gauge 817a during the continuous battle effect. The image data of the displayed mode is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6654 that the remaining number of short times has reached 70 times (S6654: Yes), it is based on the fact that the end condition of the battle effect (continuous battle effect) executed during the time saving state is satisfied. Then, a display command indicating battle defeat is set (S6656), the in-battle flag 223ca is set off (S6657), and the process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S6656, a defeat effect in which the character 817 is defeated in the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (a).

  Next, contents of the special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure change start process (S4291). This special view change start process (S4291) is executed instead of the special view 1 change start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special view 2 change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) of the first embodiment described above. It is That is, since the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are performed simultaneously (in parallel) with the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, While each variation start process is configured to be executed, in the third embodiment, each special figure lottery (variation) is configured not to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), so the start of the special figure variation is started. The processing to be executed at timing is made common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  When the special figure fluctuation start process (S4291) is executed, first, the special figure fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S4371), and then, the same as the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above (see S4204 in FIG. 61). The processing of S4352 and S4353 is executed, and thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation (lottery draw) of this time is a jackpot (S4381). In this process, the possibility of jackpot winning is determined based on the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

  If it is determined in the process of S4381 that the special figure fluctuation (lottery draw) of this time has not won the jackpot (S4381: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation (lottery draw) of this time is winning the big hit (S4381: Yes), next, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to on (S4382). That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation to be executed while the battle effect is being executed has been a big hit.

  If it is determined in the process of S4382 that the in-battle flag 223ca is not set to on (S4382: No), this process is ended, and it is determined that the in-battle flag 223ca is set to on. (S4382: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the jackpot elected this time is the junior high school jackpot (S4383), and if it is determined that it is the junior high school jackpot (S4383: Yes), a display command indicating battle rematch is set. (S4384), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4383 that the time is not a jackpot (a probable variation jackpot) (S4383: No), the process of S4384 is skipped and the present process is ended. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4384, the image data corresponding to the rematch effect shown in FIG. 113 (b) is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Ru.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212). In this jackpot start process (S4212), processing is performed to perform various settings based on the presentation status (at a battle presentation or not) at the timing when the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot type of the jackpot winning this time.

  When the jackpot start process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether the in-battle flag 223ca is set to on (S6701), and it is determined that it is not set to on, that is, outside the battle effect period. If it is determined that the jackpot game has been executed (S6701: No), it is determined whether the present jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S6702). In the process of S6702, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type stored in the slave state setting area 223k.

  If it is determined in the process of S6702 that it is a probability variation jackpot (S6703: Yes), a display command indicating battle victory is set as a display mode of the battle effect to be executed during the jackpot game (S6703), and the battle flag The H.223 ca is set to ON (S6704), and the process shifts to the process of S6709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6702 that it is not a probability change jackpot (time jackpot hit) (S6702: No), a display command indicating battle continuation is set as a display mode of battle effect executed during the jackpot game. Then (S6705), the processing of S6704 and S6709 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S6701 that the in-battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S6706) and a probability variation jackpot When it is determined (S6706; Yes), a display command indicating battle victory is set (S6707), the process proceeds to S6709, and when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not determined in S6706 (S6706: No), A display command indicating battle continuation is set, and in the process of S6709, a display jackpot start command is set, and this process is ended.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game to be executed based on the jackpot win is a probability change state (the next jackpot It is configured such that one of the time-saving state (until winning a jackpot, the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times, or the winning a jackpot) is set.

  In other words, if a definite change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are continuously set until the next big jackpot is won, so a positive change state is set The chances of being able to win many prize balls were extremely high. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to continue the probability change state with high probability, and by providing the possibility of causing the player to obtain many winning balls, game prosperity is increased. As a measure to prevent the problem, a measure is considered to reduce the probability that the probability change state continues (for example, the percentage of the probability change state continues to be 65% or less).

  By taking such measures, it becomes possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not give the player excessive expectations for the winning balls, but as in the prior art, the probability change state is high. In the effect (effect for showing the lottery result of a special symbol) used in the pachinko machine 10 which continues with probability (for example, 80%), when used for the pachinko machine 10 which took measures, the presentation effect However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  Specifically, during the jackpot game, when the character of the player battles against the enemy character and wins the battle, in a battle effect informing that the positive change state is set after the end of the present jackpot game. If the probability that the probability change state continues decreases, the winning rate of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game decreases, and the player's sense of expectation (a probability change state is set when the battle effect is executed. There is a problem that the feeling of expectation for the game is diminished, and the game will decline.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the continuous battle effect of continuing the battle effect from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of a predetermined end condition (for example, 30 special pattern changes) is satisfied. When the jackpot is won during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the satisfaction of the predetermined termination condition, an effect for winning the battle is executed. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle effect can be increased, and a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the player wins a probability change jackpot (a jackpot for which a probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game), a battle effect for winning the battle during the jackpot game is executed, The continuous battle effect is executed only when the player wins the jackpot) in which the time saving state is set after the game is over. This can further increase the probability of winning in the battle effect.

  In addition, during the continuous battle rendition, it is configured to make the rendition result of the continuation battle different according to the type of the jackpot which is won, for example, the battle victory rendition if It is configured to execute a battle rematch production if it is executed and a time junior high is won during continuous battle production. In this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the defeat presentation losing to the battle when the junior high school hit is won during the continuous battle production. Therefore, since the frequency with which defeat production is performed after battle production is performed can be reduced, the ratio of a battle victory can be raised relatively.

  In the present embodiment, the time reduction number is 30 times (the number of times of special figure fluctuation after the time reduction state is set to 30 times) as an end condition of the continuous battle effect (battle effect to be executed during the time reduction state). Although the case is set as the end condition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of special figure fluctuation that satisfies the end condition may be variably set by the effect drawing means. In this case, a jackpot type may be provided in which a value other than 100 (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is over.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle effect is executed, and to make it difficult for the player to recognize the remaining number of shortings after the end of the continuous battle effect.

  In addition, as a guarantee period notification effect in which the player is notified of a period (battle effect guarantee period) in which the continuous battle effect does not end, for example, the physical fitness gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, it does not lose The effect indicating the invincible mode may be configured to be executable, and the period in which the invincible mode continues may be notified.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the termination condition of continuation battle production may be set based on the number of times of special figure change in time saving state, it does not restrict to this, for example, the lottery result of a special symbol is other than a big hit In a part of the game machine configured to be able to win the player a small bonus (a bonus different from the big hit game) less than the big hit game, the small hit game is based on the small hit win (small hit game execution It is good to constitute so that the end condition of continuation battle production is satisfied.

  In this case, it is preferable to execute a small hit game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big hit game is opened as a small hit game to be executed at the time of the small hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a defeat effect of losing the battle during a period when the variable winning device 65 is in an open operation, so the player is subjected to the defeat effect during the jackpot game. It can make you think.

  Furthermore, it is preferable that the continuous battle effect be terminated based on the condition established earlier among the winnings in the special hit during the time saving state, the number of times the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). . Thus, it is possible to suppress the continuation battle effect from becoming excessively long and to make the continuation period of the continuation battle effect indefinite.

First Modified Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133, a first modified example of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), so each variation is made with respect to each special figure. The start process is configured to be executed, and as shown in FIG. 9A, only the fluctuation effect corresponding to any special image fluctuation (special image 1 fluctuation in FIG. 9A) is displayed as the third symbol display device It was configured to be displayed in 81 main display areas Dm.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the player can use the third symbol display device 81 because variation effects corresponding to a plurality of special image variations are not simultaneously executed by the third symbol display device 81. It was possible to suppress the occurrence of the occurrence of a situation that would be confused by the change effect to be executed, but it is difficult to understand that a plurality of special symbol variations are being executed simultaneously (in parallel), a plurality of There is a problem that the game is played without the player being able to understand the distinctive game characteristic that the special symbol variation is executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  On the other hand, in the first modification, one special figure fluctuation is the main fluctuation display, the other special figure fluctuation is the sub fluctuation display, and the fluctuation effect (main fluctuation effect) corresponding to the main fluctuation display is also the sub fluctuation The fluctuation effect (sub-variation effect) corresponding to the display is also displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the change effect corresponding to the main change display is more prominent than the change effect corresponding to the sub change display.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first modified example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 130 (a). FIG. 130 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the first modification, the main display area Dm of the display screen is compared with the main fluctuation area Dma and the sub fluctuation area Dmb with respect to the display screen of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is formed and configured to execute the main change rendition in the main change region Dma and the change rendition according to the sub change region Dmb, and the other elements are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the first modification, the main change area Dma is formed larger than the sub change area Dmb, and the main change rendition is sent to the player. It is configured to be able to be performed more prominently than the fluctuation effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to one of the plurality of fluctuation effects being executed, among the plurality of fluctuation effects being executed.

  In the first modification, the main variation region Dma is performed when a specific variation effect (a variation effect with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a super reach effect)) is executed as the variation effect performed on the sub fluctuation region Dmb side. It is configured to be able to execute display switching processing for switching between the fluctuation effect performed in step S. and the fluctuation effect performed in the sub fluctuation region Dmb. As a result, when the change effect to be watched by the player is executed, the change effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  However, when a specific change effect (a change effect for winning a big win (for example, a super reach)) is set as a change effect to be executed on the sub change area Dmb side, an expectation for winning for a big hit is also expected in the main change area Dma. When a high degree of fluctuation effect (for example, super reach) is executed, the fluctuation effect performed in the main fluctuation area Dma is suddenly switched, and the effect is provided to the player in an intelligible manner. There was a problem of

  In addition, for the player who wants to see the effect until the end, the specific change effect being executed in the main change area Dma is a change effect that is difficult to be executed and the effect is not based on the lottery result of the special symbol. There was a risk that the fluctuating production would be switched suddenly, causing a sense of dissatisfaction.

  On the other hand, in the first modification, when performing (setting) the fluctuation effect (special figure 1 fluctuation effect) to be executed in the main fluctuation region Dma, the sub fluctuation region Dmb reserved and stored The prediction result of the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation effect (special figure 2 fluctuation effect) to be executed is determined, and it is determined whether or not the winning information has a winning information to be won. Then, when it is determined that the winning information to win the jackpot is determined, the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 may set a particular variation effect (for example, a deviated super reach effect). When it is (for example, an out-of-order variation pattern showing a variation time of 90 seconds), it is not a specific variation effect but a normal variation effect (for example, a short-time out-of-range variation pattern with 10 seconds variation time (see FIG. 18) Is configured to execute a special change effect which is performed a plurality of times of change effect setting corresponding to.

  By configuring in this way, even if the change effect performed in the main change area Dma is switched from the special figure 1 change effect to the special figure 2 change effect, in the main change area Dma before switching Since only the corresponding variable effects are executed, the variable effects can be switched smoothly without giving a sense of discomfort or dissatisfaction to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow of effects in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing the flow of each effect in the case of switching the fluctuation effect that is variably displayed in the main fluctuation region Dma and the sub fluctuation region Dmb. As shown in FIG. 129, the timing for setting the fluctuation effect (special figure 1 fluctuation effect) of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the lottery result is out and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds fluctuation) executed in the main fluctuation area Dma At (timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information in the special figure 2 is read out from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is a big hit fluctuation, or the next variable display is executed. It is determined whether the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 has information indicating a big hit.

  As a result of the determination described above, when it is determined that the special figure 2 suspension corresponding to the special figure 2 variation (second variation in special figure 2) to be executed next has the information indicating the big hit winning, the special figure As the fluctuation effect of 1 fluctuation, a special fluctuation effect that sets the fluctuation effect (short time fluctuation effect) selected at fluctuation time of 10 seconds is pseudo-continuously executed is set and executed. Thereby, the second variation of the special figure 2 is executed, and the variation of the special figure 1 variation is performed at the effect switching timing (the timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 variation effect in the main variation area Dma. Since the out-of-range fluctuation effect is executed for a short time as the effect, the fluctuation effect can be switched without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In addition, at the time of setting the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the main fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution, the special time of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed in the future, etc. Since a normal out-of-range fluctuation can be performed at the effect switching timing (the timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 fluctuation effect in the fluctuation area Dma, the process for setting the fluctuation effect It can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130 (b) and FIG. 131, the contents of the effect displayed when changing the change effect that is changed and displayed in the main change area Dma and the sub change area Dmb will be described. FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents at the time when the fluctuation representation of the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed in the main fluctuation region Dma, and FIG. 131 is the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents at the time of execution in the main variation area Dma.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (b), at a point before the switching timing of the fluctuation display, fluctuation representation of the special drawing 1 fluctuation (short time deviation fluctuation presentation) is executed in the main fluctuation area Dma, and the sub fluctuation area Dmb is Thus, the fluctuation effect (reach generation) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. After that, when it is the timing when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation develops to the super reach, the fluctuation presentation of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the main fluctuation area Dma as shown in FIG. Super reach effect (effect of fish swimming in the display area) is executed.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation is displayed by switching to the sub fluctuation region Dmb. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 131, it shows the time when one of the short-term deviation fluctuation effects executed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner is finished, and the third symbol displayed in the sub fluctuation area Dmb temporarily stops In FIG. 131, it is displayed in the rocking stop state). As described above, in the case where pseudo-outside short-term variation fluctuation effects are configured to be executed a plurality of times, the third symbol is displayed in a temporary stop manner at the end of each short-term out-of-variation performance effect. Therefore, it can be thought that the special figure 1 fluctuation is performed multiple times.

  Furthermore, in the first modified example, the display position (the left side of the main display area Dm) at which the special view 1 change effect is executed, and the display position (the right side of the main display area Dm) the special view 2 change effect is performed The main change area Dma and the sub change area Dmb are variable without changing. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of which special symbol the fluctuation effect being executed corresponds to. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the special figure 1 fluctuation effect and the display position of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect are changed without changing the position of the main change area Dma and the position of the sub change area Dmb. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to fix the position at which the fluctuation effect to be watched to the player is executed, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In addition, in the first modification, the main change area Dma and the sub change area Dmb are formed without changing the same size before and after the switching timing of the change display, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after switching of the fluctuation display, the main fluctuation region Dma may be formed larger than before switching, and the sub fluctuation region Dmb may be formed smaller than before switching. As a result, it is possible to further emphasize the fluctuation effect performed in the main fluctuation area Dma after the switching, and to make the player interested. In addition to changing the size of each variable area, for example, the frame mode for dividing each variable area may be changed. For example, only the main variable area Dma after switching, the color of the frame mode May be configured to be different from others in red, or to make the shape of the frame form into a circle different from the others.

  Furthermore, in the first modification, when setting the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation executed on the main fluctuation area Dma side, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on the winning information of the other special figure fluctuation (prior In addition to this, in addition to this, based on the prize information of the other special figure fluctuation, fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation it decides The timing at which the special view is stopped and displayed by the combination indicating the jackpot, and the timing at which the change effect is switched may be determined, and the change effect may be set based on the determination result.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. In the first modification described above, the main variation region Dma and the sub variation region Dmb are formed, and in each variation region, variation effects corresponding to the special figure variation are respectively executed, and the sub variation region Dmb side When a specific change effect is executed by the special figure change of the special symbol corresponding to the change effect performed in the main change area Dma, and the special symbol corresponding to the change effect performed in the sub change area Dmb Was to execute the change production switching process of switching the

  On the other hand, in the second modification, when a specific fluctuation effect is executed by the special figure fluctuation on the side of the sub fluctuation area Dmb, a special that combines the main fluctuation area Dma and the sub fluctuation area Dmb. The difference is that the variation region is formed, and variation effects corresponding to a plurality of special figure variations are performed in the special variation region. The other elements are the same as those of the first modification described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second variation, the variation display shown in FIG. 130 (a) of the above-described first variation is performed in the normal variation state. And, similar to the first modification described above, the fluctuation effect (special figure 1 fluctuation effect) of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the lottery result is out and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds fluctuation) executed in the main fluctuation area Dma At the timing of setting (the timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information in the special figure 2 is read out from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is a big hit fluctuation or the next fluctuation. It is determined whether the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 on which the display is executed has information indicating a big hit.

  If it is determined that the special figure 2 suspension corresponding to the special figure 2 variation (second variation in special figure 2) to be executed next has information indicating a big hit as a result of the determination described above, FIG. 132 The special variation regions Dma to Dmd shown in (a) are formed. Here, with reference to FIG. 132 (a)-FIG.133 (b), the presentation content in the 2nd modification is demonstrated.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the special variation areas Dma to Dmd, and FIG. 132 (b) is a special variation area Dma at the time when the jackpot variation of the special figure 2 is started. FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display content during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2; FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the display content of ~ Dmd; FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of display contents in the case of being stopped and displayed in a combination showing a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are formed of four variation display areas, and the special variation area Dma corresponds to the special figure 1 variation in the special variation area Dmb. The change effect corresponding to the special figure 2 change is configured such that the decoration change effect of the simulated symbol is executed in the special change area Dmc and the special change area Dmd. Then, a comment of “multi reach” indicating that the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are formed is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Thereafter, when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed in the state where the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are displayed, the state shown in FIG. 132 (b) is obtained. In FIG. 132 (b), a display mode “351” indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuation is out is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma, and a reach display showing that the special figure 2 fluctuation is a reach state It is displayed in the special variation area Dmb. Further, in the special variation area Dmc and the special variation area Dmd, the decoration variation display for indicating the jackpot expectation of the special figure 2 variation being executed is executed, and the reach indication is displayed also in the special variation area Dmc There is.

  In addition, the display area of the special variation area Dma becomes smaller based on the special variation area Dma showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 variation and the symbol being stopped and displayed, and the special variation area Dmb in reach state and The display area of the special variation area Dmc is formed large. In this manner, by varying the size of each of the special fluctuation areas Dma to Dmd according to the fluctuation state in each fluctuation area and the fluctuation result, the area to be watched can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

  Thereafter, when the special view 2 variation display progresses, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), only the special variation area Dmb is in the reach state, and in the other variation areas, the display mode indicating the deviation is displayed. The comment of "last chance" is displayed. In this state, the next variation display is executed for the special figure 1 variation, but on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the result of the previous special figure variation is temporarily displayed in the special variation area Dma. It has been maintained

  By configuring in this manner, even if the special view 1 change is newly executed, the multi reach effect using the special change areas Dma to Dmd is not uncomfortable. In addition, when the special figure 1 change performed newly is a big hit, for example, the effect that the third symbol starts to change again in the special change area Dma is executed from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) It may be configured to As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what effect mode and how long multi-reach using the special variation areas Dma to Dmd will continue, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display area of the special variation area Dmb becomes the largest, and the big variation is "big hit" in the special variation area Dmb. The third symbol "555" indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed together with the comment. In this state, since the special figure 1 variation being executed is forcibly removed and stopped, "351" indicating that the special figure 1 has been removed and stopped is displayed in the special variation area Dma.

  Further, the decoration variation display performed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd is variably displayed in the presentation mode for suggesting the jackpot expectation of the special figure 2 variation, and the stop timing of the special figure 1 variation, The fluctuation period of each variable display is configured to be set based on the interval of the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation.

  Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation is executed and the multi reach is displayed, that is, the special figure 2 variation that is the big hit variation is not started, the decoration performed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd The variable display is changed and displayed in a state where the effect mode is not set. Then, at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the special chart 2 is executed, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of the special chart fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is calculated, and the special fluctuation region is calculated based on the calculation result. Set the variation time of the decoration variation display performed in Dmc and Dmd.

  With this configuration, even when the period until the special figure 2 variation displayed in the special variation area Dmb stops is short after the special figure 1 variation displayed in the special variation area Dma stops. Even in the long case, the multi reach effect can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In addition, the structure of multi reach production is not restricted to this, for example, when the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is within a predetermined time, the special fluctuation The regions Dmc and Dmd may be fused to perform one decoration variation display, or the decoration variation display may be performed only in the special variation region Dmc, and a mini character may be made to appear in the special variation region Dmd. It may be configured to execute a suggestion effect that indicates the jackpot expectation of the multi-reach inside.

  In each of the above-mentioned modifications, while the special change effect (a change effect of a mode in which a plurality of short-time out fluctuation patterns are pseudo-falsely executed continuously during a change period of 1) is performed. Also, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 is configured to be displayed in the normal manner. That is, in the special variation effect, even while the third symbol is temporarily stopped, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol for which the special variation effect is being executed is configured to continue the variation display, but it is limited to this It is not something that can be done. For example, the corresponding fourth symbol may be controlled to be temporarily stopped synchronously with the temporary stop period during the execution of the special variation effect. With this configuration, even if the player visually recognizes the fourth symbol during the execution of the special variation effect, it can be difficult to distinguish whether or not the special variation effect is being executed. Therefore, before and after the switching timing of the variable display, although the third symbol is temporarily stopped, it is possible to suppress the unnatural display content that the fourth symbol continues to be changed and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, for example, the fourth symbol may be difficult to visually recognize during at least the temporary stop period during the execution of the special variation effect. More specifically, for example, the fourth symbol is not displayed, the fourth symbol display area is displayed in a reduced size, or the predetermined character is displayed at a position where the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) is hidden. It may be configured to operate. By comprising in this way, display control of the 4th design can be simplified rather than the case where the display mode of the 4th design is synchronized with the temporary stop period of special variation production.

  Also, as a method for making it difficult to recognize whether or not special variation effects are being performed, for example, by making the back image around the fourth symbol display area the same color as the fourth symbol, at least during the temporary stop period. Alternatively, it may be difficult to visually recognize whether the fourth symbol is variably displayed or stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the fourth pattern by the extremely simple control of changing the rear surface image, so that the display control can be further simplified. In addition, since the back image is changed, the player can be made to feel as if an effect different from a normal effect is being performed, and therefore, the expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Furthermore, for example, while the main variation region Dma and the sub variation region Dmb are switched, and the special view 2 variation display is performed in the main variation region Dma, the display of the special view 2 variation display in which the display region is expanded. Depending on the content, the fourth symbol display area may be shielded. That is, in the example of FIG. 131, the fish image developed and displayed in the super reach is also displayed in the fourth symbol display area (the fish image is displayed in the layer in the layer before the fourth symbol display layer). The fourth symbol display area may be configured to be displayed or the characters “reach occurrence !!” may be displayed in the fourth symbol display area to make it difficult to visually recognize the fourth symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special variation effect is being performed, at least after switching of the variation area. Furthermore, for example, during the execution period of special variation effects, the meaning of the fourth symbol can be understood by changing the display position of the fourth symbol display region or reversing the arrangement of the small display regions Dm1 and Dm2. By making it difficult, it may be difficult to recognize indirectly whether it is the execution period of the special variation effect. In addition, by changing the display mode of the fourth symbol (display mode indicating that variable display is in progress and display mode indicating that stop display is in progress) periodically or irregularly, the fourth symbol From the display mode, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is being performed, and it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the special change effect is being performed indirectly. Specifically, for example, the first display method indicating that the symbol is being displayed in a variable display while the symbol is being displayed in a variable display, and the first display method that indicates that the symbol is being displayed in a stopped state by stopping the symbol; While the entire symbol display area is white, it indicates that the variable display is being performed, while the entire black becomes the second display method that indicates that the stop display is being performed, and the fourth symbol display area The left half may blink to indicate that the variable display is being performed, while the right half may blink to switch the third display method indicating that the variable display is being performed. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the special variation display is being performed.

  In each of the above modifications, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special view 1 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special view 2 are separately displayed in the fourth symbol display area, but the special view 1 is not always necessary. It is not necessary to display both the corresponding fourth symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special view 2. For example, only the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main variation region Dma may be displayed in the fourth symbol display region. By configuring in this manner, since the symbols to be noted by the player are clear not only for the third symbol but also for the fourth symbol, the convenience of the player can be improved. In addition, after the display switching process is executed, only the fourth symbol corresponding to the special drawing different from the special drawing on which the special variation effect is being executed will be displayed in the fourth symbol display area. Therefore, it can be made difficult to recognize from the aspect of the 4th design that the 3rd design is temporarily stopped.

  In each of the above-mentioned modifications, when executing the fluctuation effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation type in the main fluctuation area Dma, each holding ball (prize winning a prize (special figure 2) of the special symbol (special figure 2) in which fluctuation display is executed in the sub fluctuation area Dmb Although the lottery result of the information) is read ahead and it is determined that there is a holding ball (winning information) corresponding to the big hit, the variation effect to be executed in the main variation area Dma is set as the special variation effect, It is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the holding type (prize information) includes a deviation type (for example, a super reach etc.) with a relatively high expectation of a big hit, the predetermined percentage (for example, 1) The special fluctuation effect may be executed at a ratio of / 5). By configuring in this manner, the jackpot is determined even if the player notices that the player has been temporarily stopped (the third symbol is rocking) during the temporary stop period in the special variation production. Therefore, even after the change effect (special change effect) executed in the main change area Dma and the change effect executed in the sub change area Dmb are switched by the display switching process, the main change area Dma is displayed. It is possible to pay attention to the last of the change effects after being switched. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the second modification, when the multi reach effect is executed, the decoration variation display is performed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd. In other words, the fluctuation period was set according to the interval between the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation effect performed in the special fluctuation region Dma and the stop timing of the fluctuation effect performed in the special fluctuation region Dmb. It is not something that can be done. For example, you may synchronize with the fluctuation display period of the special figure fluctuation | variation based on each holding ball currently suspended at the time of the start of multi reach production. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation stop period of the fluctuation effect performed in each of the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd can be matched with the fluctuation stop period of the fourth symbol, so a more natural appearance of the appearance aspect Can be provided.

Regarding the ball entry unit 64 in the first embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the ball entry unit 64 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above will be described. FIGS. 134 (a) and (b) schematically show the internal structure of the ball entry unit 64. FIG. In practice, a cover body is disposed on the front side, and the cover body is formed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored in the surface so that the inside can not be seen or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult for the inside to be visible.

  A passing port through which game balls can enter is provided at the top of the ball entry unit 64, and a transmission type ball entry sensor 64c that can detect that the game ball has passed through the pass port is disposed There is. The game balls having passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distributing member 900 to the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2 disposed below the ball.

  The distributing member 900 receives the gaming ball having entered the ball in the accommodating portion 900 a or 900 c of the distributing member 900. When the gaming ball is received by the housing portion 900a, the weight of the gaming ball causes the sorting member 900 to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (a)) to enter the first game ball as the gaming ball. Guide to mouth 64b1. Here, the distributing member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees leftward and rightward, and the magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the ball entry unit 64, the magnet 900b of the distributing member 900 is disposed, and the base side magnet 901 is disposed on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900 b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to be mutually repelled in polarity. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is formed of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S-pole or N-pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that its tip end faces the distributing member 900 side.

  The magnet 900 b is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet as the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distributing member 900 so that the tip end faces the base-side magnet 901. The base side magnet is located at a position where the distributing member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall of the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is right above (the center line of the interval at which the game ball of the passage port can enter approximately 1 ball) A position 901 is closest to the magnet 900b of the distributing member 900 (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), it is possible to stop at a position where the boundary wall of the repulsion member 900 is directed upwards. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the left or right.

  As a result, when the distributing member 900 reaches a position where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage (upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, so that the distributing member 900 is either left or right. The housing portion 900a or the housing portion 900c turns to the side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the first ball storage device 64. Therefore, by receiving the entered game ball in the containing portion of the containing portion 900a and the containing portion 900c, the game ball is appropriately set to either the first ball entrance 64b1 or the second left ball entrance 64b2. It can be distributed.

  Also, for example, after the housing portion 900a receives the gaming ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left by repelling the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, the gaming ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64b1, It is possible to prevent the distributing member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the gaming ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64b1, the housing portion 900b faces upward, and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry unit 64 next is received by the housing portion 900b, By the weight of the game ball, the distributing member 900 is rotated about 30 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the second left ball entrance 64b2. As described above, the distributing member 900 can alternately guide the game ball entering the ball entry unit 64 to the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2. Therefore, the game ball can be distributed equally to the first ball entrance 64b1 and the left second ball entrance 64b2, and it is possible to make a prize, which will be described later, a lottery game caused by the prize for the first ball entrance 64b1 The lottery game (FIG. 1 lottery game) and the lottery game (special figure 2 lottery game) resulting from the winning of the left second entrance 64b 2 can be executed efficiently.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment simultaneously (parallelly) the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) Is configured to be executable. Therefore, the ball that has passed the passage opening of the ball entry unit 64 alternates between the first ball entrance 64b1 that triggers execution of the special figure 1 lottery and the left second ball entrance 64b2 that triggers execution of the special figure 2 lottery. By providing the distribution members 900 so as to be distributed to each other, it is possible to efficiently perform lottery (variation) of each special symbol.

  In the first embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball that has flowed into the specific area formed on the game area) is the first ball entry port 64b1 (special figure 1 lottery trigger) A sorting member 900 (sorting means) is provided for alternately distributing to the second winning slot 64b2 (starting winning slot serving as a lottery for special figure 2) and the left second ball entrance 64b2 (allocation means). Alternatively, distribution means for distributing regularly at different ratios (for example, 2 to 1) to the first entrance 64b1 and the left second entrance 64b2 may be provided. In this case, the special figure fluctuation to be executed It is good to constitute so that a distribution ratio may become high to a ball entrance corresponding to a special figure classification by the side where short fluctuation time is easy to be chosen as fluctuation time. With this configuration, each special figure fluctuation can be efficiently executed.

  Further, the balls which have flowed into the ball entering unit 64 can be distributed to the first ball entrance 64b1, the second ball entrance 64b2, and the other ball entrances (for example, general ball entrance 63). A member 900 (distribution means) may be provided. Further, in the first embodiment, the configuration in which the balls distributed by the distributing member 900 surely enter the ball inlets is used, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The ball may be distributed to a channel that can enter the ball.

  Further, the ball distributed to a specific flow channel by the distribution member 900 may be configured to be able to enter a plurality of ball inlets, for example, the distribution member 900 may be a first flow channel, and a second flow channel. A ball can be distributed to the flow path, and the ball distributed to the first flow path is 80% to the first inlet port 64b1 and 10% to the second left ball entry unit 64b2, It may be configured to enter the general entrance 63 at a rate of 10%. In this case, the ratio of entering the ball into each ball entry port may be different between the ball distributed to the first flow channel and the ball distributed to the second flow channel, and in the case of using such a configuration Even if there is a distribution that can distribute the balls into a channel that can easily enter the first ball entrance 64b1 and a channel that can easily enter the left second ball inlet 64b2. Included in the concept of means.

  In addition, there is provided a rolling area in which the balls flowing into the ball entering unit 64 can circulate, and a plurality of passage openings are formed in the rolling area, and the balls passing through each passage are different from each other It may be configured to be able to enter the first ball entrance 64b1 as a trigger for drawing, the second left ball entrance 64b2 as a trigger for drawing a special figure 2, and the general ball entrance 63). When such a configuration is used, it is possible to make the passing port through which the ball rolling on the rolling area passes different by the force of the balls rolling on the rolling area, so the ball flowing into the ball entering unit 64 Can be irregularly passed to each passage, and the number of balls entered into the ball entrance which is advantageous to the player is greater than the number of balls entered into the other ball entrances. It is possible to have the possibility. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while enjoying which passage the ball having flowed into the ball entry unit 64 passes through, and which ball entry into which the ball enters. In addition, such a configuration, that is, a configuration in which balls having flowed into the ball entry unit 64 are randomly distributed toward a plurality of ball inlets is also included in the concept of the sorting means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the configuration of the distribution means provided with one distribution member 900 in which the distribution destination is variable based on the passage of the ball is used, the present invention is not limited to this. A distribution means for changing the distribution destination may be provided, or a plurality of distribution means may be used to change the ball distribution destination. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, although the ball entering means capable of entering only the ball distributed by the distributing member 900 is provided, the invention is not limited thereto, and the ball distributed by the distributing member 900 can enter the ball. The ball entrance may be disposed at a position where it is possible to enter a ball that has not been distributed to the distributing member 900, that is, a ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64. In this case, it is configured that the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball distributed to the distributing member 900) is easier to enter the ball entrance than the ball not flowing into the ball entry unit 64. good.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to watch the ball flowing down the game area while expecting the ball to flow into the ball entry unit 64, and it is possible to provide a game that does not come tired. In addition, since a ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 may also enter the ball entry port, expectations can be given to the ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 until the end. .

  Furthermore, when the number of balls flowing into the ball entering unit 64 becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number within a predetermined period, the distributing means distributes the ball to a specific ball inlet which is more advantageous to the player than other ball inlets. You may comprise so that it may become easy. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to play a game (sparking of balls) eagerly in order to make many balls flow into the ball filling unit 64 in a short period of time.

  As mentioned above, although the distribution means (distribution member 900) which has various technical thought was demonstrated, you may provide the distribution means which combined each of each technical thought mentioned above suitably.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment described above, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, the battle effect to be executed during the big hit game is performed until the special figure fluctuation number during the short time state reaches the predetermined number of times (30 times). It was configured to run continuously. Then, when the number of times of special figure fluctuation in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times), the battle effect is ended, and the effect of entering the time saving state (see FIG. 114 (b)) is executed. It was

  On the other hand, in the third modified example, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in a part of the lottery results other than the jackpot, a bonus different from the jackpot game executed at the jackpot win is awarded Small hit game is configured to be able to win a small hit game is executed. Furthermore, when the time reduction state is set after the big hit game is over, the effect (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the big hit game) to be executed during the big hit game is a predetermined termination condition (special figure fluctuation It is configured to be continuously executed until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times) or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit is won) is established as a lottery result of a special symbol, and an end condition is satisfied. After that, a short time rushing effect (see FIG. 135 (b)) is executed to indicate that the short time state has been set. With this configuration, it can be considered that the time saving state is set at the timing when the end condition is satisfied. In addition, about the control which wins a small hit in the special figure lottery, the control object regarding the big hit winning in each embodiment mentioned above is changed to a small hit, and the decision value of the winning (the value of the first random number counter C1) If the small hit game is executed by setting the range different from the range corresponding to the big hit, a small hit operation scenario different from the big hit operation scenario (for example, the round game is one round, the variable winning device 65 A round game to be opened is performed, and the variable winning device 65 is operated based on the winning of five balls or the opening period being 0.5 seconds elapsed as the round ending condition of the round game. Since the points are different and the others are the same, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Furthermore, in the third modification, the predetermined end condition is configured to have an end condition (small hit) in which the timing that is satisfied becomes irregular. By configuring in this way, even if the time reduction state (for example, 100 times reduction) is internally set a fixed number of times, the time reduction states of various time reductions depending on the timing at which the time reduction entry effect is performed Can be set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the contents of the effects of the third modified example will be described. FIG. 135 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen having a display mode that can be executed during the big hit game displayed after the big hit game (during time reduction state), and FIG. 135 (b) is a view It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the time short rush screen. In addition, in each element displayed in each figure, about the element same as each embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (a), when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the ending screen displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game is continuously displayed. In this ending screen, a display mode Dm5 indicating the number of winning balls obtained by the player in a period (continuous change period) in which the gaming state (probable change state, time reduction state, big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player is continuously set. And the display mode Dm10 which shows the number of times of the jackpot game performed in the continuation period is displayed. Note that since the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) is internally a short time state, a variation display mode (arrow) indicating that the special view 2 variation is being performed is displayed in the small display region Dm2. . This makes it possible to make the jackpot game continue even though the time saving state is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, since the game board 13 is configured such that the game executed during the time saving state and the game executed during the big hit game become the same game (right-handed game). The present gaming state is never determined by the player according to the gaming method.

  Next, when the end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the time shortening entry effect is performed. Here, in the third modification, when the end condition is satisfied by the small hit, the remaining number of shorts at that time is determined, and the determined remaining number of shorts is a good value of the drill (for example, the lower digit is When it is not “0”, the number of corrections obtained by correcting the actual number of remaining shorts is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, since the time reduction number (remaining time reduction number) displayed when time reduction entry effect is performed can be set to a good value of time, the time reduction state is set when the time reduction effect is performed. The timing can be reminiscent of.

  In the diagram shown in FIG. 135 (b), 80 which is the number of corrections is displayed in the remaining short number display area Dm11. Then, in the small display area Dm2, a display mode of "341" indicating that the special figure 2 has won the small hit is displayed. In the third modification, a winning game is executed in which the same variable winning device 65 is varied between when the player wins a small hit and when the player wins a large hit. Therefore, when the short time rushing effect is executed based on the small hit, since the time shorter rushing effect is executed based on the execution of the winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is changed, the player can On the other hand, it is possible to make the time at which the time saving state is set reminiscent of the time at which the time reduction entry effect is performed.

  In this modification, when the small hitting game is over, the short time rushing effect shown in FIG. 135 (b) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At times, it may be configured to execute short-time entry effects.

  Next, an electrical configuration according to the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration of the third modification is different from the above-described third embodiment in that a battle end flag 223ca, a corrected flag 223acb, and a correction number storage area 223cc are added. It is. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted. In the third modification, among the display modes displayed during the big hit game, the "big hit ending screen (see FIG. 135 (a))" is used as the display mode also displayed after the big hit game is over. Although the point differs from the third embodiment described above (in the display mode displayed during the big hit game, “Battle effect screen” is displayed as the display mode also displayed after the big hit game is over), for the convenience of description, Description will be made using the flag names (in-battle flag 223ba, battle end flag 223ca) used in the third embodiment. That is, in the third modification, it is shown that the big hit ending screen (see FIG. 135A) is displayed when the battle flag 223ba is set to ON, and a battle end flag 223ca described later is displayed. When set to ON, it indicates that a condition for ending the display of the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135A) is satisfied.

  The battle end flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the end condition is satisfied based on the small hit, and is set to ON when the end condition is satisfied by the small hit.

  The corrected flag 223acb is a flag for indicating that the displayed remaining number of shorts has been corrected, and is set to ON when the remaining number of shorts is corrected. By setting the corrected flag 223 acb to ON, an effect mode (correction effect mode) is executed to adjust the difference between the corrected number of time reductions and the actual number of time reductions as the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation. .

  The correction number storage area 223cc is a storage area in which a value indicating the correction remaining short number after correcting the remaining short number and a value indicating the difference between the correction remaining short number and the actual remaining number of shorts are stored. Based on the value stored in the number-of-corrections storage area 223cc, the correction effect mode set as the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation is set.

  Next, control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third modification, the small hit end process in the small hit game is changed from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above and The difference is that the battle effect updating process is changed to battle effect updating process 4 and the special figure change start process is changed to special figure change start process 4. Other than that is the same, and the detailed explanation is omitted. Note that, as described above, in the third modification, among the display modes displayed during the big hit game, the display mode also displayed after the big game ends, as compared with the above-described third embodiment, “a battle effect display However, for convenience of explanation, the processing relating to the battle effect in the third embodiment described above is diverted as it is. In the third modification, when the process relating to the battle effect is performed, the process relating to the jackpot ending screen is performed.

  First, the contents of the small hitting end process 4 (S2571) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting end process 4 (S2571). When the small hitting end process 4 (S2571) is executed, first, in order to determine whether the current stage is in the battle effect, it is determined whether the in-battle flag 223ba is set to ON (S2791). When it is determined that there is a flag (S2791: Yes), the in-battle flag 223ba is set to off (S2792), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is off (S2791: No), this processing ends.

  Next, contents of the battle effect update process 4 (S4651) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the contents of battle effect update process 4 (S4651). In this battle effect update process 4 (S4651), it is determined that the first end condition (the number of remaining times has reached 70) has not ended while the battle effect is being executed with respect to the battle effect update process described above. If it is (S6654: No), it is determined whether the battle end flag 223ca is set to on (S6671), and if it is determined to be on (S6671: Yes), the number correction process (S6672) is executed. The points are different and the others are identical. Detailed description of the same content is omitted.

  Next, contents of the number correction process (S6672) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the content of the number-of-times correction process (S6672). In this number of times correction process (S6672), a process for correcting the remaining number of short times at the end of the battle effect to a good number of times is executed.

  When the number correction process (S6672) is executed, first, the number of remaining times is extracted (S6691), and it is determined whether the lower one digit of the extracted remaining number of short times is "0" (S6692), "0" If it is determined that (S6692: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the last digit is not “0” (“1 to 9”) (S6692: No), the number of corrections with the last digit of the remaining number of shorts corrected to “0” The time count is set (S6693), the set correction count is stored in the correction count storage area 223cc (S6694), the correction completed flag 223acb is set to ON (S6695), and the process ends.

  Next, contents of the special figure fluctuation start process 4 (S4291) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure change start process 4 (S4291). The special figure fluctuation start process 4 (S4291) is different from the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation start process in that the correction frequency handling process (S4391) is executed, and the other process is the same. Detailed description of the same content is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the correction frequency handling process (S4391) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the correction count handling process (S4391). In this correction number correspondence process (S4391), when the number of remaining short times displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the number of remaining short number of corrections, the difference between the number of short remaining corrections and the actual number of short times A process is performed to set a fluctuation effect for setting 0 to 0.

  When the correction number corresponding process (S4391) is executed, it is first determined whether the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6801). If it is set to ON (S6801: yes), the current fluctuation time is determined. Is determined to be 30 seconds or more (S6802). If it is determined in S6802 that the time is 30 seconds or more (S6802), the value stored in the correction count storage area 223cc and the actual remaining number of shorts are read (S6803), and the difference is calculated (S6804).

  Then, the display mode corresponding to the difference value referred to in the process of S6804 is set (S6805), and the value (difference value) stored in the correction count storage area 223cc is updated according to the selected display mode S6806), it is determined whether the updated difference value is 0 (S6807). If it is determined that the difference value is 0 (S6807: Yes), there is no need to set the correction effect any more, so the correction completion flag 223acb is set to OFF (S6808), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that S6801: No, S6802: No, and S6807: No, this process ends.

  The process of S6802 is a process of determining whether or not the remaining-time short-time correction effect (effect for bringing the number of remaining short-time times on the display closer to the actual remaining short-time number) as the current fluctuation effect is possible. In this modification, it is assumed that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set as the execution condition of the short remaining-time correction effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The presentation mode (range of the value of the remaining number of short times to be updated) may be varied.

  As described above, in the third modification, the effects to be executed during the big hit game (for example, the effects for displaying the ending screen of the big hit game) are set when the time saving state is set after the big hit game is over, Continues until a predetermined ending condition (special map fluctuation number reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times) or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small winning) is won as a lottery result of special symbols) is established during time saving state It is configured to be executed, and after the end condition is satisfied, a short time rush effect (see FIG. 135 (b)) indicating that the time saving state is set is performed. With this configuration, it can be considered that the time saving state is set at the timing when the end condition is satisfied.

  Furthermore, in the third modification, the predetermined end condition is configured to have an end condition (small hit) in which the timing that is satisfied becomes irregular. By configuring in this way, even if the time reduction state (for example, 100 times reduction) is internally set a fixed number of times, the time reduction states of various time reductions depending on the timing at which the time reduction entry effect is performed Can be set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the third modification, when the remaining number of short times is corrected, the correction processing is performed to correct the value to a value smaller than the actual remaining number of short times, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of the reference values (for example, the lower one digit is “0” or “5”), correction processing may be performed to correct the value to the smallest difference. In this case, the number of time reductions after correction (correction remaining number of shorts) may be greater than the actual number of remaining time reductions, but in this case, it is displayed during one fluctuation effect as a fluctuation effect of special figure fluctuation. It may be configured to execute a fluctuation effect in which a plurality of values of the remaining short number of times (values of the corrected remaining short number of times) are subtracted. Specifically, as in the case of one special effect change (for example, 60 seconds) and two special image changes being executed, the temporary effect of temporarily stopping the third symbol after 30 seconds and restart it It may be configured to execute and subtract 1 from the value of the remaining number of short times displayed according to the temporary stop timing. As a result, the remaining number of short times on display can be brought close to the actual number of short times without giving a sense of discomfort.

  In the third modification, the player is notified of the remaining period (the number of remaining times for which the time saving state is set) by the time reduction effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In a gaming machine in which the probability change state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 100 times) by changing the game state to become the time change state from the time reduction state to the probability change state, the remaining period (remaining probability change number) for which the probability change state is set You may use the structure alert | reported by rush production.

  Furthermore, when the special figure lottery is executed in the state where the definite variation state is set, fall lottery means which performs the lottery whether or not to end the definite variation state is provided separately from the big hit lottery means which performs the big hit lottery In addition to the 1st end condition (special figure fluctuation 30 times) and the 2nd end condition (small hitting is elected) in the period (for example, 100 times) where the definite change state is set, each condition of the 3rd condition (falling election) It may be configured to change the effect mode to be executed according to the establishment of.

  In this case, for example, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the probability change notification effect is executed, and if the third condition is satisfied, the probability change notification effect is changed to It may be configured to execute the above-described time shortening notification effect. Further, when the second end condition is satisfied, when the third condition is not satisfied, the definite notification effect is not executed, and the time-shortening notification effect is performed only when the third condition is satisfied. You may.

  In the third modification, among the display modes displayed during the big hit game, the “big hit ending screen (FIG. 135 (a))” is used as the display mode also displayed after the big hit game is ended, It may be a display mode that makes it seem that the player is currently playing a big hit game, for example, an interval screen displayed during an interval period may be displayed, or a display displayed during a big hit game A dedicated display mode having at least a part of the mode (for example, a display mode displayed in the small area Dm5 or the small area Dm6) may be used.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a further modification to the battle effect in the third modification described above will be described. In the above-described third modification, when the time-short winning game is won, a predetermined ending condition (special figure fluctuation number is a predetermined number of times (30 times) after the end of the big hit game is finished (after the time saving state is set). The battle effect is continuously executed until a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit is won) is established as a result of reaching a special symbol or a lottery result of a special symbol. When the jackpot was won, it was configured to execute the effect that won the battle (battle victory effect). By configuring in this way, the execution frequency of the effects (Battle defeat effect) that are defeated in the battle at the end of the time junior high hit game is suppressed, the win rate of the battle effect (Battle victory effect execution rate) is increased, It was intended to be able to bring interest to the presentation results.

  However, in the third modified example described above, when the reckless rendition is executed when the reckless jackpot is won during the battle rendition during the short time state, the period of one battle rendition is extended, and the player takes on the rendition There was a problem of getting bored. In addition, despite winning the jackpot a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will not be able to see victory or defeat as a result of the battle production, and the player will not be able to understand.

  On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the time saving state is set is changed 30 times after the time saving state is set (as the ending condition of the battle effect) It was configured to select different fluctuation time in the first short term until the set number of special chart fluctuation times) and the second second short term after that, and was won the jackpot during the first short term In such a case, a variable time (30 seconds) capable of setting a victory effect period in battle effect and a pseudo probability variation period in which a probability variation effect to be executed during a probability variation state is simulated is selected. ing.

  By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won during the first short period (during battle rendition), regardless of the type of jackpot won (probable variation jackpot, time junior college jack), the staging result of the battle rendition being executed It is possible to reliably execute the effect of winning the battle (Battle victory effect). Therefore, it is possible to further increase the winning percentage of the battle effect (execution ratio of the battle victory effect), and to allow the player to have an interest in the effect result.

  Furthermore, it is configured to execute different effects depending on the jackpot type of the jackpot won during the first short period. Specifically, when winning in a definite variation big hit (8 rounds, 16 rounds) during the first short period, an effect of winning a big hit is executed during the above-mentioned pseudo probability variation effect period, and the transition to a big hit game is made. Then, a new battle effect (battle victory effect) is executed in the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. On the other hand, if the odds are won during the first short period during a short term (two rounds), the pseudo battle effect period is set after the pseudo probability period, and the jackpot is won during the pseudo probability period. After executing the effect, the simulated battle effect is executed, the jackpot game is started during the battle effect, and the effect result (battle victory effect) of the simulated battle effect is displayed during the short jackpot game period of two rounds. It is composed of In this way, when winning a probability change jackpot during the first short period of time, it is possible to perform two battle victory effects by the end of the probability change jackpot game, so it was used in the third modification described above It is possible to further increase the winning rate of the battle effect (execution ratio of the battle victory effect) than the configuration and allow the player to have an interest in the effect result.

  In the fourth modification, when the jackpot is won during the first short period, the constant fluctuation time (30 seconds) is selected regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is limited thereto. If you win the jackpot type that the simulated battle effect is executed without any chance, the fluctuation time longer than when winning another jackpot type, that is, the fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds) longer by the production period of the simulated battle effect May be configured to be selectable. As a result, since the period until the simulated battle effect is executed can be set to a certain period, it is possible to suppress the determination of the jackpot type of the jackpot which has been won this time until the simulated battle effect is executed. Can.

  On the other hand, when the first short-time (in the battle production), when winning the time junior high, just like the above-mentioned probability variation big hit, the first battle victory production is executed during the big hit fluctuation and the pseudo probability variation production is executed Do. Then, in the second battle effect (battle effect during the big hit game or simulated battle effect), the battle effect which continues from the end of the big hit game until the end condition is satisfied is executed.

  By configuring in this way, even when the time junior high is won during the first time in a short period, it is possible to execute one battle victory effect, so the winning ratio of the battle effect (execution ratio of the battle victory effect) ) To allow the player to be more interested in the rendering result. In addition, since battle victory effects can be executed a number of times corresponding to the number of times the jackpot is won during battle production, effects without giving a sense of discomfort to the player can be provided.

  Here, although the detailed description is omitted, the contents of the effect of the pseudo probability variation effect will be described. In the fourth modification, when the probability change state is set as in the third embodiment and the third modification described above, the probability change effect in which the character 811 runs on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. . During the pseudo-determination effect, an effect (concept including the same effect) including at least a part of the effect modes among the effect modes to be executed when the probability change state is set is performed, and the effect period is performed during the effect period It is comprised so that the pseudo | simulation change production which makes the special figure fluctuation | variation be performed several times may be performed.

  This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the pseudo probability variation effect performed in a partial period of one special figure variation (big hit variation) and the probability variation effect executed across a plurality of special figure variations. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the probability variation / time reduction table 202de2 will be described as a variation pattern table used in the fourth modification. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variation / time reduction table 202de2. The table 202de2 for definite variation / time reduction is different from the above-described probability variation / time reduction table 202e2 (see FIG. 19) in that the table to be referred to is different based on the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and each of the variation type counters CS1. It differs in that the types of fluctuation patterns defined corresponding to the values are different, and the others are the same. About the same content, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  Specifically, it is a period (first short period) from when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100 to 71", that is, until the special figure fluctuation number reaches 30 times after the time reduction state is set, If the judgment result is a hit (large hit, small hit), the time variation A jackpot fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the judgment result is false, the fluctuation type counter It is defined that the short-time A deviation fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the value of CS1.

  On the other hand, the value of the hour reduction counter 203 h is “70 to 1”, that is, a period (second time period 2) after the special figure fluctuation count has elapsed 30 times since the hour reduction state is set, and the judgment result is hit ( In the case of big hit, small hit), the short time B big hit variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and if the result of the judgment is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " In the case of the range of 0 to 179 ", the short B deviation variation pattern 1 with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected, and in the range of" 180 to 198 ", the short B deviation variation pattern 2 with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected It is stipulated that

  In the fourth modification, by using the above-described table 202de2 for probability variation and time reduction, a short period (when the first period is short) when the battle effect is being performed and a short period when the battle effect is not being performed (the second period is short) And make it possible to select different fluctuation times. Then, during the first short time period, when the special figure lottery is out, the fluctuation time shorter than the second short time period is selected, while when the special figure lottery is the winning, the longer fluctuation than the second time short term Since time is selected, the degree of advantage in the short time state is not greatly different between the first short time and the second short time.

  Further, in the fourth modification, when the small win is won during the first short period, and the end condition of the battle effect is satisfied, the battle win effect is performed once, similarly to the effect executed when the big hit is mentioned above. It is comprised so that it may be performed during a small hitting change to the production which loses a battle by performing and performing pseudo | simulation probability variation production then, and performing pseudo battle production performed after that. As a result, the battle effect can be ended without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In this case, as the fluctuation time of the small hitting fluctuation, the fluctuation time longer than when winning to the other jackpot type, that is, the fluctuation time long by the period until the staging result of the simulated battle effect is displayed (for example, 60 seconds) It is good to be able to select it.

  Further, although detailed description will be omitted, if the small win is won during the first short period, and the termination condition of the battle effect is satisfied, the period between the small hitting game end and the first short period end The variation time of the feature map variation to be executed is configured to be selected based on the data table to be referred to during the second short period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable time corresponding to the various effects in the battle effect from being selected even though the battle effect is ended.

  As described above, in the third modification and the fourth modification, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to set the time saving state which is more advantageous than the normal state and the probability changing state which is more advantageous than the short time. The effect of notifying the player that the time saving state which is disadvantageous to the player is set out of the probability variation state and the time saving state is executed after the predetermined end condition is established after the time saving state is set. Although configured as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to set the time saving state or the probability changing state based on the small hit.

  In addition, in the time saving state set when winning in the big and short winning in lottery, a fluctuation time (for example, 5 to 60 seconds) of about a little shorter than the normal state (for example, 5 to 60 seconds) It is configured to be easily selected, and when a small hit is won during the short time state, the data table to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is switched, and a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 to 0.5) It may be configured to be easy to select 5 seconds). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also easier to be selected in the short time after winning a small hit in the short time state than when the time short state is set, similarly to the fluctuation time of the special figure mentioned above It should be configured to be

  By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that the time saving state is set based on the winning of the small hit, and the number of remaining short times at the time of the small hitting is on the appearance Since the number of times is reduced, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in which various numbers of times are reduced. In such a case, by using the technology of the third modification described above, it is possible to provide the player with a game without discomfort.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of combinations of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (generally referred to as setting), and the setting can be changed on the game shop side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of stages of setting, any combination of jackpot probability (combination of jackpot probability in low probability state and jackpot probability in positive change state) in any of plural stages (for example, 6 stages) Although what can be set to is mentioned as a representative example, it is not restricted to this. As a pachinko machine that can change the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of jackpot, for example, instead of or in combination with the jackpot probability, according to the setting May be That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be varied. More specifically, for example, the rate at which a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is varied depending on the setting, or the small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined It is also possible to vary the degree of advantage for each setting by varying the ratio according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio in which the jackpot to which a large number of short time (for example, 100 times) is given after the big jack end is determined is varied according to the setting, or the small jack (for example, 0 times) is given The rate at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot ends, the rate at which the jackpot is determined to shift (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability change state) can be varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (eg, normal state) Depending on the setting, the rate at which the jackpot is determined (or is easy to shift) may be changed. In addition, a jackpot type may be provided in which the proportion determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (which is hardly determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. And in setting 6, while the number of rounds is determined the number of rounds of six rounds at a rate of 2% when becoming a big hit, in other settings only six rounds of jackpots are determined at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as composition. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of being the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play by paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot be able to. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of becoming the jackpot type to which 66 times of time reduction may be given after the jackpot end may be configured to be higher than other settings. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game jackpot type in which the big winning opening (or prizes inside the big winning mouth etc) operates with an operation pattern different from other jackpot types A configuration may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined in a specific setting (a ratio to be determined is increased). Also, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability change state, the jackpot is set in a disadvantageous setting for the player. It is good also as composition which makes a big hit probability so that there is. In this configuration, in particular, in the definite change state, the more the number of drawing special symbols, the easier it is to increase the number of balls (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired) It is effective in the gaming machine. More specifically, for example, by applying to a game machine of a type that lasts until the probability change state wins the next big win, and in the probability change state is a small hit type with high probability, the advantage of high setting is achieved The sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big hit is likely to be large, so there are many chances to obtain a winning ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the definite change state, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit.

  Further, in the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  All or a part of the embodiments described above and each control example may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be linked more accurately by the number of gaming balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. More specifically, the passing number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment (FIG. Refer to S4211, S4212, S4219 and S4220). Then, during execution of the standby state effect, whenever the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the aspect of the chance meter CM is updated so as to become the gauge number corresponding to the updated counter value. Thereby, the aspect of chance meter CM can be made into the aspect according to the condition of the upper surface of actual opening-and-closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted to the other embodiments by the same method.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature group A> (set whether or not to duplicate button effects and execute)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means Means for storing mode information for indicating the state in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, wherein the plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of the same priorities. It is something which has execution production setting expedient which sets whether or not to execute the above-mentioned production which corresponds to the above-mentioned plural items of information which are remembered in the same priority of the above-mentioned production execution expedient A game machine A1 characterized by.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which various effects are performed at various timings as suggested effects to further enhance the effects of the suggested effects (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, by performing an operation effect for causing the player to operate the predetermined operation means as the suggestion effect, the player participation type suggestion effect is executed, thereby There are gaming machines with improved interest. However, since there are many players whose game intention is lowered by executing a large number of suggested effects, a plurality of players perform effects satisfying only by executing the suggested effects according to a predetermined rule. There was a problem that it could not be done and the interest of the game would be reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine A1, mode information for indicating an effect mode of an effect to be executed by the effect executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of mode information of the same priority, and the effect rendering setting means performs an effect on the plurality of mode information stored in the same priority. It is decided what to do.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to variably set the presence or absence of duplicate execution of effects corresponding to each aspect information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority order is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, each aspect information is set to be redundantly executable, and when the effect is actually executed, the aspect of the effect to be executed is variable according to the setting contents of the execution effect setting means. Therefore, even when the interval between the effect setting timing at which the effect mode is set and the effect execution timing at which the effect based on the effect mode set is different is largely different, the execution effect setting means at the effect execution timing There is an effect that the effect according to the setting content of can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the mode information storage means transfers the mode information stored in a specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. A game machine A2 characterized by being memorized.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the mode information stored in the specific storage area is transferred to and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area when the migration condition is satisfied. As a result, the effect mode to be executed can be varied depending on whether or not the transition condition is established, so that various effects can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the effect mode having the same priority is set by the effect mode setting means, an order determining means capable of determining the order in which the effect modes are set, and the plurality And an erasing unit configured to erase the mode information stored in the storage area of the storage unit, wherein the erasing unit has the same number of effect modes for which the same priority is set by the effect setting means. The order information stored in the mode information storage means is erased in order from the mode information stored in the mode information storage means based on the determination result of the order determining means when the number of storage areas corresponding to the priority order is set larger. A game machine A3 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, setting is performed when the effect mode in which the same priority is set is set more than the number of storage areas corresponding to the priority. The order is eliminated in order from the old rendering manner. Therefore, since it is possible to easily execute the effect corresponding to the effect mode set most recently, it is possible to provide the player with an effect without a sense of discomfort and to improve the interest of the game.

  If the setting corresponding to the mode information stored in one storage area is set to be performed for the same priority using the configuration of the gaming machine A1, Aspect information corresponding to the set presentation aspect may be stored in one storage area, and the other aspect information may be erased by the erasing unit.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A3, the effect execution means stores first aspect information in a predetermined first storage area among the plurality of storage areas of the aspect information storage means, and the specific first storage area When a specific second mode information different from the first mode information is stored in a second storage area different from the second game area, an effect of a special effect mode is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the mode information stored in the plurality of storage areas is stored in a predetermined combination, the special effect mode is performed. Thus, with respect to the processing of storing the aspect information in the storage area by the aspect information storage means, the processing for storing the rendering aspect already set, and the processing for establishing the execution condition of the special rendering aspect. , Can have dual roles. In addition, it is possible to have a role for executing special rendition style even for mode information with low priority for which the corresponding rendition is hard to be executed, so that the stored mode information can be used effectively it can. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be executed efficiently.

  The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A4 includes operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the effect executing means The game machine A5 is characterized in that it is possible to execute at least an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed based on the determination result of the operation determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, since it is possible to execute operation effects in which the operation means operable by the player is used, the player is interested in the effects to be performed There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5, the effect mode setting means can set, as the effect mode, an operation effect mode in which an operation effective period in which the determination result of the operation determining means is effectively determined is set, the effect execution The means stores, as the first mode information, first mode information corresponding to the operation effect mode in the first storage area, and as the second mode information, second mode information corresponding to the operation effect mode A game machine 6 characterized by executing the special effect mode when stored in the second storage area.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A5, the special effect can be executed in a situation where a plurality of operation effect modes are executed, so the player is interested in the effect to be executed There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A6, the effect executing means is set to the operation effective period set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the first mode information and the operation effect mode corresponding to the second mode information. When the operation effective period overlaps, the effect of the special effect mode is executed, and the effect of setting the operation effect mode is executed in the effect of the special effect mode. Game machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation effects are redundantly set, the special effects can be easily performed. In addition, when the effective period of operation is set overlappingly, since it is possible to execute the effect of the special effect mode as the operation effect, it is possible to execute the effect of the special effect mode while continuing the effect of operating the operation means be able to. Therefore, the effect of the special effect mode can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature group B> (change the area for storing button effects according to the setting opportunity)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means The aspect information storage means for storing the aspect information for indicating in the plurality of storage areas having different priorities, the effect aspect setting means including at least at least the setting conditions for setting the effect aspect A predetermined first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition are satisfied, and the mode information storage means is satisfied when the effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means. A game machine B1 characterized in that the ranges of the plurality of storage areas for storing the mode information are made different according to the setting conditions.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which various effects are performed at various timings as suggested effects to further enhance the effects of the suggested effects (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). In addition, there is also a gaming machine configured to execute more suggestive effects so that the suggestive effects can be set at various timings. However, by performing a large number of suggestion effects set at various occasions, there is a problem that a complicated effect is executed as a whole and the gaming intention is lowered. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object to provide a game capable of suppressing the decline in the game intention due to the executed effect and improving the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the first setting condition or the second setting condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is selected. Aspect information for indicating is stored in a plurality of storage areas with different priorities by the aspect information storage unit. And according to the setting conditions currently materialized when a production | presentation aspect is set, the range which stores aspect information among several storage areas can be varied. Thereby, according to the setting condition of a production | presentation aspect, since a priority can be provided in a priority, the regularity can be given to the production | presentation performed based on each production | presentation aspect set on several conditions . Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the complicated effect being executed, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game intention due to the effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of the same priorities, and the plurality of aspects stored in the plurality of the same priorities in the effect execution unit A game machine B2 having execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to information.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, mode information for indicating an effect aspect of an effect to be executed by the effect executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of mode information of the same priority, and the effect rendering setting means performs an effect on the plurality of mode information stored in the same priority. It is decided what to do. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to variably set the presence or absence of duplicate execution of effects corresponding to each aspect information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority order is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, each aspect information is set to be redundantly executable, and when the effect is actually executed, the aspect of the effect to be executed is variable according to the setting contents of the execution effect setting means. Therefore, even when the interval between the effect setting timing at which the effect mode is set and the effect execution timing at which the effect based on the effect mode set is different is largely different, the execution effect setting means at the effect execution timing There is an effect that the effect according to the setting content of can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the aspect information storage unit migrates the aspect information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area. A game machine B3 characterized by being stored.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the mode information stored in the specific storage area is transferred to and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area when the migration condition is satisfied. As a result, the effect mode to be executed can be varied depending on whether or not the transition condition is established, so that various effects can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. .

<Feature group C> (premium presentation for low priority presentation)
An effect executing means for executing an effect for a predetermined period predetermined based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect executing means, and an effect mode setting means Means for storing mode information for indicating the effect mode set by the user in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, the effect mode setting means having an execution period of the effect It is possible to set the effect mode so as to overlap, and having effect end means for ending the effect under execution before the predetermined period elapses when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. A game machine C1 characterized by being.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine which enhances the staging effect of the suggestion production by executing various productions at various timings as the suggestion production, and in such a gaming machine, the priority is preset to a plurality of suggestion productions. It has been proposed that, when the execution timings of the suggested effects overlap, it is proposed to execute the suggested effects with high priority (for example, JP-A-2014-200589). In such a gaming machine, since the suggestive effect is executed according to the predetermined priority, for example, by setting the high priority to the suggestive effect with high effect, the low effect with the effect is executed By doing this, it is possible to solve the problem that the highly suggestive effect of the effect of rendering is not executed and the interest of the game is reduced. However, when the suggestion effect to be executed based on the predetermined priority is configured to be executed, it is difficult to perform the suggestion effect with low priority, and the suggestion effect to be executed becomes monotonous, There is a problem that the player gets bored early in the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the mode information for indicating the set effect mode has a different priority by the mode information storage means It is stored in a plurality of storage areas. Then, during the execution of the effect, when the end condition is satisfied, the effect is ended before the predetermined period determined in advance by the effect end means elapses. Thus, the execution period of the effect can be made different depending on whether the end condition is satisfied, and among the mode information set in the overlapping period, the effect based on the mode information with lower priority can be easily performed. . Therefore, various effects can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine C1 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means is predetermined. A game machine C2 characterized in that the end condition is satisfied when the judgment result is.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the termination condition is satisfied based on the player operating the operation means, the player can select the period during which the effect is executed. Can. Therefore, the amount of the effect to be executed can be varied according to the player's willingness to participate in the effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game capable of giving a bonus to the player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result , And the effect mode setting means is a first effect mode which is easily set when at least the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and a second effect which is more difficult to be set than the first effect mode An aspect can be set, and the aspect information storage means stores first aspect information for indicating the first effect aspect and second aspect information for indicating the second effect aspect. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is stored in a storage area having a lower priority than the storage area.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first effect mode which is easily set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result for which the bonus game is executed is set to have a lower priority than the second effect mode which is difficult to be set. Be done. As a result, if the end condition is satisfied and the effect period of the effect being executed is shortened, the effect corresponding to the second effect aspect is more easily performed. As a result, it is possible to provide new game characteristics that make it possible to expect early termination of the effect being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature D group> (strings of effects of different priorities)
An effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means Means for storing mode information for indicating the state in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, the effect executing means corresponding to one priority among the plurality of storage areas A second aspect stored in a second storage area corresponding to another priority lower than the one priority when the first aspect information stored in the first storage area satisfying the condition satisfies a predetermined effect A game machine D1 characterized in that an effect corresponding to information is also linked and executed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine which enhances the staging effect of the suggestion production by executing various productions at various timings as the suggestion production, and in such a gaming machine, the priority is preset to a plurality of suggestion productions. It has been proposed that, when the execution timings of the suggested effects overlap, it is proposed to execute the suggested effects with high priority (for example, JP-A-2014-200589). In such a gaming machine, since the suggestive effect is executed according to the predetermined priority, for example, by setting the high priority to the suggestive effect with high effect, the low effect with the effect is executed By doing this, it is possible to solve the problem that the highly suggestive effect of the effect of rendering is not executed and the interest of the game is reduced. However, when the suggestion effect to be executed based on the predetermined priority is configured to be executed, it is difficult to perform the suggestion effect with low priority, and the suggestion effect to be executed becomes monotonous, There is a problem that the player gets bored early in the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine D1, an effect corresponding to the aspect information stored in the plurality of storage areas having different priorities by the aspect information storage means is executed based on the priority by the effect execution means. Furthermore, when the first aspect information stored in the first storage area corresponding to one priority level satisfies a predetermined rendering condition, the second storage area corresponding to another priority level lower than the one priority level The effects corresponding to the stored second mode information are executed in association with each other. Thereby, an effect with low priority can be linked to an effect with high priority and executed. Therefore, various effects can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine D1 includes effect period setting means capable of setting a period during which the effect is performed by the effect execution means, and the effect period setting means executes a first effect corresponding to the first aspect information. Game machine D2 in which the first effect period of time and the second effect period of time in which the second effect corresponding to the second mode information is executed are set to be different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the respective effect periods so that the first effect period in which the first effect is executed and the second effect period in which the second effect is executed do not overlap. Since the effect is set by the effect period setting means, it is possible to reliably inform the player of a plurality of effects to be executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In the gaming machine D2, a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game capable of giving a bonus to the player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. The effect mode setting means has at least the first effect which is easily set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and the second effect which is more difficult to be set than the first effect. A game machine D3 characterized by being settable.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is possible to associate and execute the first effect that is easy to be set and the second effect that is hard to be set when the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result of executing the bonus game. Furthermore, the second effect is an effect having a low priority to be executed alone. Thereby, when the second effect is executed, it can be thought that the execution of the second effect of this time is related to the first effect, and a sense of expectation for the bonus game being executed Can be enhanced. Thus, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the game machine D2 or D3, the effect period setting means sets the second effect period before the first effect period.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second effect period is set before the first effect period, so the second effect is executed earlier than the first effect. It will be. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the first effect is executed earlier than the second effect, and the sense of expectation to the player at the time when the second effect is executed is lost. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect to be continuously executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the effect period setting means executes the second effect without associating the first effect with the first effect and without associating the second effect with the first effect. Game machine D5 characterized in that the period in which the second effect period is set is different depending on the case.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the second effect of this time is executed in association with the first effect based on a period during which the second effect is executed. Since it is possible to predict whether or not the player is interested, it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

<Feature E group> (special effects when switching the target of the main fluctuation effect)
A first determination unit that executes the first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied, and a second that differs from the first determination when a second determination condition that is different from the first determination condition is satisfied The second determination means for performing the determination, the first effect execution means for causing the display means to execute the first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means for a predetermined period, and the determination result for the second determination means Second effect executing means for causing the display means to execute the second effect for the predetermined period, the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, and the second effect executing means An effect mode setting unit capable of setting an effect mode of the second effect; and an effect switch means for switching the first effect being executed to the second effect when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied; And the effect mode setting unit is configured to Gaming machine C1, wherein the matter is a representation embodiment of the first effect that is performed in a state that may be satisfied, is to set a special effect is produced.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine that enhances the effect of the suggested effect by performing various effects as the suggested effect at various timings, and in such a game machine, the suggested effect is set at different timings based on different occasions. And, when one suggestion production is being executed, when another suggestion production is executed, the one suggestion production in progress is forced to end and another suggestion production is executed. Game machines (e.g., JP-A-2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even while one suggestion effect is being executed, another suggestion effect can be executed, so the kind of effect to be executed can be increased and the effect can be enhanced. is there. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the other suggestion effects are executed regardless of the indication situation of the one suggestion effect being executed, the player can be determined by the sudden change of the suggestion effects to be executed. And the player's willingness to play has been reduced. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect in execution indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), the predetermined process change aspect is ended halfway by switching the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects without disturbing the player in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the switching condition is satisfied, the first effect in execution is switched to the second effect by the effect switching means. Then, the special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in the state where the switching condition can be established. As a result, since the effect mode of the first effect is set as the special effect mode and the effect of the special effect mode is executed when switching to the second effect, it is possible to execute various suggested effects without disturbing the player. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the game machine E1, the effect mode setting means is configured to set a related effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect as the special effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect is set as the special effect mode, so when switching from the first effect to the second effect There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved without disturbing the person.

  The gaming machine E2 includes operation means operable by the player and operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect execution means and the first effect execution means The 2 effect executing means can execute at least an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and the effect mode setting means may perform the operation effect as the second effect. A game machine E3 characterized by setting an effect mode corresponding to the operation effect as the special effect mode of the first effect, when is set.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the effect mode setting means is easily set as the effect mode of the first effect when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific determination result And a second effect mode which is more difficult to set than the first effect mode, and is characterized in that the second effect mode is set as the special effect mode of the first effect. Game machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the first effect is switched to the second effect, the effect mode of the first effect being executed can be set as an effect mode in which the player's interest is low, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from being lowered by switching the 1 effect to the second effect.

<Features F group> (Continuingly executing the positive progression promotion effect after the end of the jackpot)
Discrimination means capable of performing predetermined discrimination, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating discrimination results of the discrimination means, and dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means A bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the stop display of the identification information in a specific display mode, and setting after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is ended Game state setting means capable of setting a first game state which is advantageous to the player and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game states to be played In the game machine, at least, during the execution of the bonus game, it has a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect capable of notifying that the second gaming state is set as an effect result, and the notification effect execution means Wherein when the privilege game which benefits the first gaming state after the end of the game is set is finished, the gaming machine F1, characterized in that it is intended to perform the notification effect until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, after the end of the bonus game, it is possible to set one of the advantageous gaming state where it is easy to win a win and the disadvantageous gaming state where it is hard to win a win, and during the bonus game, after the bonus game is over It has been proposed to be able to execute suggestion effects for suggesting a game state to be set (for example, JP-A-2014-200589). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to experience at one time the enjoyment of acquiring a bonus during a bonus game and the fun of predicting a set gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The However, if it is determined that the gaming state set after the end of the bonus game is the disadvantaged gaming state by the suggestion effect executed during the bonus game, the gaming motivation after the end of the bonus game is reduced. There was a problem. In addition, the rate at which the advantageous gaming state is set is previously determined by the type of gaming machine. For example, in a gaming machine at which the rate at which the advantageous gaming state is set is low, it is suggested to be executed during the bonus game There is a problem that it is difficult to execute an effect that suggests that the advantageous game state is set in the effect, and the suggested effect itself causes the player's intention to decrease the game. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the notification effect executed during the execution of the bonus game by the notification effect executing means is set to the first gaming state, the predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the bonus game is ended. It will run until you Thereby, the first game state is set after the end of the bonus game, and the second game state is set after the end of the bonus game while the first game state is in progress and the end condition is satisfied. When is executed, it is possible to set a notification mode for notifying that the second gaming state is set, as a result of the notification effect. Thereby, compared with the case where the notification effect is executed only during the bonus game, it is possible to increase the rate at which the notification mode for notifying that the second gaming state is set is set as the effect result of the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute the notification effect that the player can have a sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine F1 has a measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of discrimination of the discriminating means, and a measurement discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the number of times of discrimination measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times. The game machine F2 is established when it is determined by the measurement determination unit that the number of determinations after the first gaming state has been set has reached the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, since the termination condition is satisfied based on the number of discriminations of the discrimination means, the discrimination means is performed between the termination of the bonus game and the termination condition. Can be determined. Therefore, it is effective in the ability to make high the ratio by which the alerting mode which alert | reports that 2nd game state is set is set as a presentation result of alerting | reporting effect.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, the bonus game From the first state when the special benefit game executing means capable of executing the special benefit game capable of giving the special benefit different from the privilege that can be given to the person, and the special benefit game or the special benefit game is performed It has variable means which can be changed to the second state, and the end condition is satisfied when the special bonus game is executed in the state where the first gaming state is set. A game machine F3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine F3, since the termination condition is satisfied when the special benefit game in which the variable means is variable is executed, the termination condition is given to the player as if the bonus game was executed. It can be thought that it was established. Therefore, the period until the end condition is established can be considered as a bonus game, and there is an effect that the notification effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game in which the first game state is set by the bonus game execution means until the end condition is satisfied. The game machine F4 executes the notification effect until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a bonus game in which it can not be notified that the second gaming state is set while the notification effect is being executed. As long as the player wins, the notification effect can be continuously executed, so that it is difficult to execute the notification effect indicating that the second gaming state is not set as the effect result of the notification effect. Therefore, it is effective in the effect that the production | generation result of alerting | reporting production can relatively increase the ratio used as the alerting | reporting result which shows that 2nd game state is set.

  In the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period, and the special game by the special game execution means The special period setting means capable of setting the special period to be executed, the remaining period judging means capable of judging the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the above special words judged by the remaining period judging means Special period informing means capable of informing the remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the period, the special period informing means notifying the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied A game machine F5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exerted. That is, after the termination condition is satisfied and the notification effect is terminated, the remaining period of the special period is notified, so that the remaining period indicated by the remaining special period information can be made different according to the timing of the completion of the termination condition. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the length of the special period set when the first gaming state is set. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature G group> (time-in-time rush production with a small hit in time-saving state)
Discrimination means capable of performing predetermined discrimination, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating discrimination results of the discrimination means, and dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means A bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the stop display of the identification information in a specific display mode, and setting after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is ended Game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and an effect capable of executing a predetermined effect The effect execution means has an execution means, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the effect execution means performs the first until the first notification condition is satisfied after the bonus game is ended. 1 production The second effect is more difficult to be executed when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set based on the execution and the first notification condition being established. A game machine G1 characterized in that it is to be executed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, after the end of the bonus game, any one of the first gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, and the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, can be set for a predetermined period. It has been proposed that, during a game, a suggestion effect for suggesting a gaming state set after the end of the bonus game can be executed (e.g., JP-A 2014-200589). In such a gaming machine, when the first game state is set after the end of the bonus game, the game will be performed for a predetermined period while holding the regret that the second game state is not set, and the bonus game There is a problem that the game intention after the end is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing the decline in the player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine G1, even if the first gaming state is set, it can be made difficult to notice that the first gaming state has been set until the first notification condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress that the player's willingness to play is reduced later. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, a period setting means for setting a period during which the first gaming state is set by the game state setting means, and a remaining period judgment means for judging the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means; A game machine G2 comprising: a notification mode for notifying the remaining period of the first gaming state at least when the first notification condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is established is notified, the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first gaming state is set, ie, is set by the period setting means It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the long period. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the period setting means sets more types of periods than the number of types actually set as the period of the first gaming state. There is an effect that a game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a special display mode different from the specific display mode, it is possible to execute a special game capable of giving a player a benefit different from the bonus game Having the special game execution means, the first notification condition being satisfied when the special game is executed in a state where the first effect is being executed by the suggestion effect execution means The game machine G3 which features.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, since the first notification condition is satisfied when the special game is executed, the timing at which the first notification condition is satisfied according to the determination result of the determination means Can be different. Therefore, since the timing at which the second effect is executed can be set irregularly, it is possible to execute effects that are difficult for the player to predict, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine G3, when the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the variable from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into a variable to the second state in which the gaming ball is easier to enter than in the first state. The predetermined opening condition may be established when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit or when the special game is executed by the special game execution unit. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, when the bonus game or the special game is executed, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state, so the special game is executed. When 1 notification condition is satisfied, it can be considered that the second effect is performed based on the execution of the bonus game. Therefore, since the remaining period notified by the second effect can be considered to be the period (initial value) set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect executing means executes, as the first effect, an effect using at least a part of the effect mode of the effect mode of the bonus game effect executed during the bonus game. A game machine G5 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the period until the first notification condition is satisfied can be considered to be in the bonus game, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the first gaming state is set, which makes the game interesting Has the effect of being able to improve In the case of using the configuration of the gaming machine G2, it is easy for the player to know what period the first gaming state has been set this time by making it difficult to understand the timing at which the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that it can be made difficult to distinguish.

  Remaining period condition judging means for judging whether the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines G2 to G5 satisfies the predetermined remaining period condition, and the remaining period condition determination means And a remaining period correction unit that executes a predetermined correction process on the remaining period when the period condition determining unit determines that the remaining period condition is not satisfied, and the effect executing unit is configured to A gaming machine G6, wherein the notification mode included in the second effect is executed in place of a correction remaining period notification manner indicating a correction remaining period corrected by the remaining period correction means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, when the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied does not satisfy the remaining period condition, The remaining period is corrected by the period correction means, and a correction remaining period informing mode indicating the corrected remaining correction period is executed as a second effect. As a result, when the value indicating the remaining period of the first gaming state is a halfway value, it is possible to notify the player of the correction value after the correction to the appropriate value. Specifically, for example, in the case where the period of the first gaming state is set based on the number of times of special feature fluctuation, the value of the remaining period (the number of times of remaining special symbol fluctuation) at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied is If the last digit is not "0" or "5" (for example, "81"), the correction process is executed to correct the value of the remaining period to be "0" or "5" (for example, , “80”), and notify the player of the corrected value. In this way, it is possible to notify the player of a good value of the touch, so that it is easy for the player to think that the timing at which the second effect is executed is the timing at which the first gaming state is set. Has the effect of

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S306 Discrimination Means S2404 Benefit Game Execution Means S2512 Gaming State Setting Means S4212 Suggested Effect Execution Means S5304 Dynamic Display Execution Means

Claims (5)

Discrimination means capable of executing predetermined discrimination;
Dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period;
A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player based on stop display of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit in a specific display mode;
As a game state set after the end of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, a first gaming state advantageous to the player and a second game advantageous to the player than the first gaming state In a gaming machine having gaming state setting means capable of setting a state,
At least the notification effect execution means capable of executing notification effects capable of notifying that the second gaming state is set as an effect result during execution of the bonus game,
A game machine characterized in that the notification effect execution means is capable of executing the notification effect until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of the bonus game in which the first gaming state is set. . Measurement means capable of measuring the number of determinations of the determination means;
Measurement determination means for determining whether the number of determinations measured by the measurement means has reached a predetermined number of times;
The end condition is satisfied when it is determined by the measurement determining unit that the number of determinations after the first gaming state has been set has reached the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to 1). Based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, a bonus that can be given to the player by the bonus game and Is a special benefit game execution means capable of executing a special benefit game capable of giving different special benefits
And a variable means capable of changing from the first state to the second state when the bonus game or the special bonus game is executed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the termination condition is satisfied when the special bonus game is executed in a state where the first gaming state is set.   When the bonus game in which the first gaming state is set is executed by the bonus game executing means until the end condition is satisfied, the notification effect executing means ends the bonus game after the end of the bonus game. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the notification effect is executed until a condition is established. Special game execution means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period when the first game state is set by the game state setting means;
Special period setting means capable of setting a special period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means;
Remaining period determination means capable of determining the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means;
Special period notifying means capable of notifying of remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the special period determined by the remaining period determining means;
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the special period notifying means notifies the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied.

Images